Digital PDFs

AA-M651B-TK

December 1982

308 pages

Original

8.9MB

Document:	ADE User’s Guide
Order Number:	AA-M651B-TK
Revision:
Pages:	308
Original Filename:	http://bitsavers.org/pdf/dec/vax/vms/layered_product/AA-M651B-TK_ADE_2.1_Users_Guide_198211.pdf

OCR Text

ADE User's Guide
Order. No~ AA-M651 B~TK

November 1982
This guide tells how to use the Application Development Environment
(ADE) software. It contains introductory material, including a sample
session, as well as more advanced material and reference information.

SOFTWARE VERSION:

ADE

V2.l

digital equipment corporation, maynard, massachusetts

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and
should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment c'orporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.

The postage-paid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests your critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future
documentation.

The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

~o~oomo TM
DEC
DEC mate
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DEC US

DECwriter
DIBOL
MASSBUS
PDP
P/OS
Professional
Rainbow

RSTS
RSX
UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

11/82-15

CONTENTS

PREFACE
PART ONE - BEGINNING TO USE ADE
CHAPTER 1
1. 1
1. 2
1. 3
1. 4
1. 5

CHAPTER 2
2. 1

2.2

INTRODUCTION TO ADE
WHAT IS ADE? . . . .
. . .
. . .
LEARN BY DOING!
. . . .
. . .
ENTERING INFORMATION . . .
. . . . . . . .
PERFORMING CALCULATIONS
........
PRODUCING REPORTS . . . .
. . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

1-1
• 1-1

. 1-2

. 1-3
. 1-4

TERMS AND CONCEPTS
SUMMARY OF ADE TERMS . . . .
PARTS OF AN ADE TABLE . . .
HOW TO TELL ADE WHAT TO DO .
HOW TO USE ADE IN YOUR WORK
HOW ADE STORES INFORMATION
The Worksheet . . . . . .

. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. .
. . .
.
.

. . .

.
.
. . . . . .
.
. . .
. . . .
. . .

.
.
.
.
.

2-1

2-3

2-4
2-5
2-6
2-6
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.5.3
Key Column . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 2-7
2.5.4
How ADE Stores Information On The Computer .
2-8
2.5.4.1
Inside ADE . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
2-8
Outside ADE . . . . .
. . .
2-8
2.5.4.2
HOW
ADE
PROTECTS
YOUR
DATA
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-9
2.6

2.3

2.4
2.5
2. 5. 1
2.5.2

iii

CHAPTER 3

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION

STARTING ADE . . . .
. . . .
. 3-2
THE ADE TERMINAL . . . . . .
. . . .
. 3-3
The ADE Screen . . .
. . .
. . . . . 3-4
3. 2. 1
The Command Area .
. . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.1.1
The Message Area .
. . . . . . . . 3-5
3.2.1.2
The Scrolling Area . . . . . . .
. . . . . 3•5
3.2.1.3
The Terminal Keyboard . . . .
. . . . . 3-6
3.2.2
Using The Keyboard . .
. . . . . . . . 3-6
3.2.3
ADE'S ONLINE TRAINING. . .
. . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3
ENTERING COMMANDS . • . .
. . . . . 3-8
3.4
Fully Prompted Command Entry
. . . 3-8
3. 4. 1
3.4.2
Defaults In Command Entry
3-10
Recovering From Mistakes
. . . . 3-10
3.4.3
OBTAINING HELP . . . • . .
. . . . . . . . 3-12
3.5
The HELP Command . . . . . .
. . . . 3-12
3. 5. 1
The HELP Key . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14
3.5.2
USING THE TERMINAL IN ADE
. . . . . . . . 3-15
3.6
Making The Worksheet PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3. 6. 1
Entering Characters, Numbers, And Blanks . . 3-17
3.6.1.1
Spacing Data . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
3.6.1.2
Entering The Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.6.1.3
Saving The Worksheet PARTS . . . . . . . .
3-21
3.6.2
Entering
More
Data
Into
The
Worksheet
PARTS
3-22
3. 6. 3
Using ADE Function Keys . . . . .
3-25
3.6.4
Standard And Alternate Functions . . . .
3-26
3.6.4.1
3.6.4.2
Active Function Keys . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Repeating A Function . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
3.6.4.3
Using The Keypad To Enter Numeric Data .
3-27
3.6.4.4
3.6.4.5
Using Some Functions .
. . . . 3-27
EXITING ADE . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34
3.7
3. 1

3.2

CHAPTER 4
4. 1

4.2
4.3
4. 3. 1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.4
4.5
4.6

ADE LANGUAGE RULES
RULES FOR NAMING COLUMNS, TABLES, AND WORKSHEETS .
ABBREVIATIONS . . . •
. .......
COLUMNS . . . . . . •
. . . . .
Character Columns . . .
. . . . . . .
.
Numeric Columns . • .
. . .
Date Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
How To Define The Three Types Of Columns . . . .
How To Use The Three Types Of Columns . . . . .
RULES FOR WORKING WITH KEY COLUMNS . . . . . . . .
HOW TO SPECIFY WORKSHEET COLUMNS IN COMMANDS . . .
HOW TO SPECIFY WORKSHEET LINES IN COMMANDS . . . .

4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-7
4-8
4-8

CHAPTER 5
5. 1
5. 1• 1
5. 1 • 2
5. 1 • 3
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6

CHAPTER 6
6. 1
6 . 1• 1
6. 1 • 2

6.1.3
6. 1 • 4
6. 1 • 5
6. 1 • 6

6.2
6. 2. 1
6.2.2

6.3
6. 3. 1
6.3.2

6.4
6. 4. 1

6.4.2
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.9.1
6.9.2
6.9.3

PRODUCING A TABLE
MAKING A WORKSHEET AND DEFINING THE COLUMNS
Making A Worksheet . . .
Naming The Columns • . . . .
Defining The Key Column

. 5-2

5-2
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . 5-2

. 5-3
ENTERING DATA . . . . .
. 5-3
LISTING THE WORKSHEET . . .
. 5-4
CHANGING DATA . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 5-5
ENTERING MORE DATA . . . . . . .
. 5-5
SAVING THE WORKSHEET AS A TABLE
. 5-6

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
USING EXISTING TABLES

. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-1

Displaying The Names And Outlines Of Tables . .
Getting A Table Into The Worksheet .
. . . .
Listing The Worksheet On The Terminal . . . . .
Listing The Worksheet On The Printer
....
Listing Lines In The Worksheet . . .
. . .
Saving The Worksheet As A Table . . . . . . . .

6-2
6-2

6-3
6-3
6-4
ENTERING NEW DATA INTO THE WORKSHEET . . . . . . . 6-4
Adding New Lines . . . . . .
. . . . 6-4
Adding New Columns •
. . . . . . .
. 6-5
CHANGING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Changing Data Values . . . • •
. . . .
. 6-7
Renaming A Column Name Or Type •
. . • . 6-7
REORDERING DATA
. . .
. . . . . 6-8
Reordering Lines . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 6-8
Reordering Columns . .
. . .
. . . . 6-9
SELECTIVELY GROUPING DATA
. . . . . .
6-10
PERFORMING ARITHMETIC ON DATA . . . . . . . . . 6-10
GRAPHING DATA . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
6-13
PREPARING DATA FOR A SIMPLE REPORT .
6-14
DESIGNING TABLES FOR MOST EFFECTIVE USE BY ADE . 6-16
Columns . . . . . .
. . • .
6-16
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
How To Design Tables . . . • . . . . . . . • .

6-16

PART TWO - USING MORE OF ADE
CHAPTER 7
7. 1
7.2
7.3
7.4

7.5

OPTIONAL PHRASES
SPECIFYING LINES - THE WHERE AND EXCEPT PHRASES . 7-2
SPECIFYING COLUMN TYPE - THE AS PHRASE . . . . . . 7-4
SPECIFYING OUTPUT DESTINATION - THE TO PHRASE
7-5
SPECIFYING A DISK AREA - THE IN PHRASE . . . . . . 7-7
CREATING AND USING NON-ADE FILES - THE EXTERNAL
PHRASE

CHAPTER 8
8. 1
8 . 1• 1

8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6

8.7

8.8
8.9
CHAPTER 9
9. 1
9. 1• 1
9. 1 • 2
9. 1. 3
9. 1 • 4
9. 1 • 5
9. 1 • 6
9. 1 • 7
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6

• • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • •

• • • •

. 7-9

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
PERFORMING ARITHMETIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Rounding/Truncating Results . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
TABLES WITH THE SAME COLUMNS AS THE WORKSHEET
8-3
TABLES WITH A COLUMN IN COMMON WITH THE WORKSHEET 8-6
UPDATING TABLE DATA VALUES . . . . . . . . .
. 8-9
BREAKING THE WORKSHEET INTO GROUPS OF LINES
8-11
ALLOWING ACCESS TO OTHER USERS . . . . .
8-13
COPYING VERBS AND REPORTS
. . .
8-14
SETTING OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS .
8-14
UNPROMPTED COMMAND ENTRY . . . . . . . .
8-16
WORKING WITH VERBS
HOW TO MAKE A VERB . . . . . . . . .
Designing The Verb . . . . . . . . . . .
Rules For Naming A Verb . . . . . . . .
Making A Verb With MAKE . . . . . . . .
Displaying The Steps In A Verb With LIST
Using A Verb . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . .
Changing A Verb With CHANGE . . .
.
MAKING VERBS THAT USE OTHER VERBS . . .
MAKING VERBS THAT USE REPORTS . . .
USING UNKNOWN NAMES AS VERB STEPS . . .
PUTTING COMMENTS IN A VERB . . . . . . . .
DESIGNING ONE VERB TO DO DIFFERENT TASKS .

. . .
. . . .
. . . .
. .
.
.
.
.
. .

. . .
. . .

9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6

9-7

9-8
9-11
9-13
9-14
9-14
9-15

CHAPTER 10

WORKING WITH REPORTS

MAKING A STANDARD REPORT FROM A TABLE . . .
10-2
10. 1
Preparing The Data For A Report
. . . 10-2
10.1.1
Rules For Naming A Report . . . . . .
10-4
10.1.2
Making A Standard Report With MAKE . . • . . . 10-5
10.1.3
Displaying Standard Report Sections With LIST
10-6
10.1.4
Using A Standard Report . . . . .
10-6
10.1.5
10.2
CHANGING A REPORT WITH CHANGE • . .
10-8
10.2.1
Report Sections . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . 10-9
10.2.1.1
COLUMNS And LAYOUT Sections . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.2.1.2
TOP And BOTTOM Sections . . .
. 10-11
10.2.1.3
WHERE And EXCEPT Sections . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10.2.2
Designing A Report . .
. . . . . . . 10-17
10.2.3
How To Change A Report . • .
. . . . . . . 10-18
10.2.3.1
Function Keys . . . . . • . . . . . .
. 10-18
Changing The COLUMNS Section . . . . . . . . 10-21
10.2.3.2
Changing The LAYOUT Section . • .
. 10-25
10.2.3.3
Changing The TOP Section . . .
• 10-29
10.2.3.4
Changing The BOTTOM Section . . . . .
. 10-31
10.2.3.5
10.2.3.6
Adding A WHERE Or EXCEPT Section .
. 10-31
10.2.3.7
Changing A WHERE Or EXCEPT Section . • . . . 10-33
10.2.3.8
Deleting A WHERE Or EXCEPT Section . . . . . 10-34
10.2.3.9
Special WHERE Sections . . . . • . . . . . . 10-35
10.2.4
Seeing Report Sections With LIST . . • . . . . 10-36
10.2.5
Using A Changed Report . . . . . . . . .
. 10-38
10.2.6
Using A Report On Other Tables . . .
. . . 10-39
10.2.7
Using FILE* To Produce More Complex Reports . 10-39
CHAPTER 11
11. 1
11.1.1
11.1.2
11. 2
11. 3
11. 4
11. 5

MANAGING TABLES, VERBS, AND REPORTS
LISTING NAMES OF TABLES, VERBS, AND REPORTS
Specifying What To List . . . . .
Specifying Where To Send The List . . . . . .
OUTLINING THE COLUMNS IN A TABLE . . .
MAKING A NEW TABLE, VERB, OR REPORT . . . • . .
RENAMING A TABLE, VERB, OR REPORT . . .
ERASING A TABLE, VERB, OR REPORT . . . . . .

vii

11-1
11-2
11-2
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-5

PART THREE -

REFERENCE INFORMATION

CHAPTER 12

COMMANDS

12. 1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
12. 10
12. 11
12. 12
12. 13
12. 14
12. 15
12. 16
12. 17
12. 18
12. 19
12.20
12.21
12.22
12.23
12.24
12.25
12.26
12.27
12.28
12.29
12.30
12.31
12.32
12.33
12.34
12.35

ADD
•
ALLOW
• •
APPEND
ASK
• • •
BACKUP • •
BREAK
• •
CALCULATE
CHANGE • •
COMBINE
•
COPY •
DIVIDE
ENTER
ERASE
• •
EXIT • • •
GET
•
GRAPH
HELP • • •
LIST • • •
MAKE • • •
MERGE
• •
MOVE • • •
MULTIPLY •
NAMES
OUTLINE
•
PICK •
REMARK • •
RENAME •
SAVE • • •
SET
SORT • • •
SUBTRACT •
TALLY
• •
TOTAL
• •
TRAIN
• •
UPDATE • •

• • • • •
•
• • • •
• • •
• •
•
• • • • •
• • • • • • •
• • •
• • • • •
• • •
• •
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

•

•
•
•
•

•

•
•

•

•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•

•
•
•

•
•

•

•
•

•

•
•

•

•
•

•
•
•

•
•

•
•
•
•
•

•

•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•

•

•
•
•

•

•
•

•

•
•

•
•
•

•

viii

•

•
•

•

•
•

•

•
•
•
• •

•
•
•
•
•

•

• • •
• • •
•
•
•
• ••
•
•
• ••
• ••
• •••••
• • • •
•
• ••••
• ••••
•
•
• ••
• • •
•
• ••
•
• • •
•
•
• ••
••••••••
• • •
• ••
• • • •
• •••
• • • • • • • •
•
• • • •
•
•
• ••••
• • •
•
• • • •
• •
• • •
• ••
• •
• •
• • • • •
•
• • • • • • • •
• •
• • •
• •
• •

•
•

12-4
12-7
12-9
12-11
12-14
12-15
12-18
12-21
12-27
12-31
12-32
12-35
12-38
12-40
12-41
12-42
12-43
12-44
12-47
12-49
12-52
12-54
12-57
12-59
12-60
12-62
12-63
12-65
12-67
12-70
12-74
12-77
12-79
12-84
12-85

APPENDIX A

ADE SIZE LIMITS

APPENDIX B

TERMINAL INFORMATION

B. 1

B.2
B.3
B.4
B.5

B. 5. 1

B.5.2
B.6

STARTING ADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
STOPPING AND RESTARTING THE TERMINAL DISPLAY . . . B-2
RESETTING TERMINAL PAGE WIDTH .
. . .
B-2
USING ADE ON DECMATE I (VT278) . . . . . . . . . . B-3
PERFORMING ADE SPECIAL FUNCTIONS . .
. . . . • B-3
VT52 Terminal (With Keypad) . . . .
. . . . B-3
Any Terminal Without A Keypad . . . . . .
. B-5
USING MAKE, ENTER, AND CHANGE COMMANDS .
. B-5

APPENDIX C

ERROR MESSAGES

APPENDIX D

FILE INFORMATION

GLOSSARY
INDEX

FIGURES
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
9-1
9-2
9-3
B-1
B-2

ADE Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
VT100 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
TRAIN Introduction Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
ADE Function Keys on VT100 Terminal . . . . . . . 3-25
One Level Verb Nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Three Level Verb Nesting . . . . . . .
. . . . 9-12
Incorrect Verb Nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
ADE Function Keys on VT52 Terminal . . . . . . . . B-4
VT52 Keyboard . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . B-4

TABLES
12-1
B-1

Summary of ADE Commands by Function . . . . . . . 12-3
Host System Terminal Information . . . . . . . . . B-2

PREFACE
Objectives and Audience
This guide describes how
to
use
DIGITAL's
Application
Development Environment (ADE) to make office work and other
tasks easier. The guide has been especially designed for use by
nonprogrammers who may also be new computer users. However,
both new and experienced ADE users will find it helpful.
The
guide assumes the reader already knows:

• How to use a terminal
• How to get on and off the host system
For the new ADE user, this guide:

• Describes how to use ADE on a VT100 terminal

• Shows how to perform basic ADE tasks
• Shows how to use the ADE commands
How This Guide Is Organized
Part One is designed for new ADE users. Chapters 1-3 give the
new user an overview of ADE, briefly describe ADE terms and
concepts, and introduce the basics of using ADE. If you are a
new ADE user, read Chapters 1-3 before starting to use ADE.
Chapters 4-6 introduce the basic ADE rules and commands and show
by example how to use the commands. Read Chapters 4-6 after
working through the ADE sample session (Chapter 3) on a
terminal.
Part Two is designed for more experienced ADE users. Chapters 7
and 8 describe optional phrases and more powerful commands.
Chapters 9 and 10 describe how to work with verbs and reports.
Chapter 11 introduces commands for managing tables, verbs, and
reports. Read Chapters 7-11 when you are ready to use more
powerful commands, verbs, and reports.
Part Three contains reference information for all ADE users.
Chapter 12 describes each ADE command, listed in alphabetical
order. There are appendixes, a glossary, and an index.
Online Tutorial
ADE also provides an online tutorial which teaches new users how
to use ADE.
This "hands-on" tutorial explains the basics of
ADE, prompts you to type in ADE commands, and displays how the
commands work to produce results. Chapter 3 shows you how to
use the TRAIN command.

Using the Terminal
ADE utilizes the VT100 capabilities;
therefore, all terminal
examples show VT100 screens and refer to VT100 keys. The use of
ADE on other DIGITAL terminals has been made to appear as much
like the VT100 as possible, making this guide practical to use
with those terminals. Appendix B, "Terminal Information," has
additional information for using ADE on other DIGITAL terminals.
You should read it if you are using ADE on other than a VT100
terminal.
Conventions and Symbols
Words inside angle brackets represent one of the following:
•

A terminal key, such as <RETURN>.

•

A terminal key combination, such as
CTRL and C keys at the same time.

•

An ADE function, such as <HELP>.

•

An ADE default choice, such as <WORKSHEET>. In most cases,
you accept the default value by pressing the RETURN key.
You can accept the default rather than entering an explicit
value.

<CTRL/C>.

In command formats and examples, the following
used:

Press

conventions
words

the

are

UPPER CASE

(also printed in red) means type
as shown.

exactly

lower case

represents ADE's command line prompts.

underlined
lower case

means replace words with a name or expression.
For example, replace table with a table name and
column with a column name.

All command examples, unless otherwise noted, show how the
command line looks after you type the last command input but
before you press the RETURN key.
In sample session command examples, the following convention
used:

+-------+ +-------+
I

I PF1
I GOLD

I (down) I
!BOTTOM I

+-------+ +-------+

represents the function key sequence
of the PF1 key followed by the DOWNARROW key. This is function <BOTTOM>.

xii

PART ONE - BEGINNING TO USE ADE

CHAPTER
INTRODUCTION TO ADE

A computer makes office work and other tasks easier by helping
you do repetitious and time-consuming jobs. Computers can:
•

Store information

•

Perform calculations

•

Produce reports on selected information

1. 1

WHAT IS ADE?

DIGITAL's Application Development Environment (ADE)
is
a
computer tool for people who are not computer programmers but
need a computer to make their office tasks easier.
Without
learning how to program a computer, you can quickly learn to use
ADE for record keeping and. bookkeeping tasks like keeping and
maintaining mailing lists, inventory lists, time sheets and
budgets. You can easily produce printed lists of your data. If
you
want
to
automate your work further or print more
sophisticated reports, you can make and use ADE procedures that
are like simple computer programs.
Whether your task is simple or complicated, ADE helps you every
step of the way. ADE tells you what kind of input it expects.
ADE also has both a HELP key and a HELP command to give you more
detailed information on request.

1.2

LEARN BY DOING!

To learn how to use ADE, read and follow the step-by-step
instructions in Chapter 3. Chapter 3 also tells you how to use
the TRAIN command to get an online tutorial that teaches you the
basics of ADE as you follow along on your terminal. As a new
user, you should try both these methods of learning ADE.
1-1

INTRODUCTION TO ADE
The rest of this chapter describes some of the tasks you can
with ADE.

1.3

ENTERING INFORMATION

One task that is sometimes hard for new computer users is how to
enter information (data) into a computer in a form the computer
can work with. ADE makes data entry easy. ADE works with the
computer;
you work with data that you can understand. ADE
keeps data in tables. Here is a sample table that shows the
data from an inventory of parts:
PN

PNAME

WHOUSE

COLOR

WEIGHT

QTY

P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
P09

NUT
BOLT
SCREW
SCREW
CAM
COG
GEAR
BEARING
BOLT

W2
W2
W1
W2
W1
W3
W3
W2
W1

RED
GREEN
BLUE
RED
BLUE
RED
GREY
GREY
WHITE

12
17

135

14
12
19
9
25
5

167

48
143
205
215
234
136

Note that columns of data are evenly spaced and the entries for
each column are aligned. ADE puts and keeps your data in this
format; you simply enter data in response to ADE's prompts.
You do not specify column widths because ADE adjusts the column
widths to fit the data you enter. When you ask ADE to show you
your data on the terminal or the printer, it always appears in
table format.
Also note that the data is in order by part number (the PN
column).
ADE puts and keeps the data in this order if you
specify that the PN column is the key column in this table.

1-2

INTRODUCTION TO ADE
1.4

PERFORMING CALCULATIONS

If your ADE table has in it the sample inventory data shown in
Section 1.3, you can tell ADE to total the number of parts. ADE
finds the sum of all the numbers in the QTY column and places
the result at the bottom of the QTY column. Here is how the
data would look after the TOTAL is complete:
PN

PNAME

WHOUSE

COLOR

WEIGHT

QTY

TOTAL

P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
P09

NUT
BOLT
SCREW
SCREW
CAM
COG
GEAR
BEARING
BOLT

W2
W2
W1
W2
W1
W3
W3
W2
W1

RED
GREEN
BLUE
RED
BLUE
RED
GREY
GREY
WHITE

12
17
17
14
12
19
9
25
5

135
167
48
143
205
215
234
136
15
1298

TOTAL

You can also use ADE to produce subtotals and running totals and
to add, subtract, multiply, and divide columns of numbers.

1-3

INTRODUCTION TO ADE
1. 5

PRODUCING REPORTS

Eventually, you can use ADE to produce a report like this:
Page 1

30-Dec-82 10: 11 AM
CURRENT INVENTORY

--------------------------------Part
Warehouse
Quantity
I

I
I
I

Number

--------------------------------P01
P01
P01

W1
W2
W3

128
135
142

Total for P01 is 405
P02
P02
P02

W1
W2
W3

92
167
251

Total for P02 is 510
P03
P03
P03

W1
W2
W3

48
74
10

*** LOW

Total for P03 is 132
P04
P04
P04

W1
W2
W3

65
143
202

Total for P04 is 410
Total for all parts is

1 '457

These are just a few examples of what ADE can do
Use this guide to learn how to use ADE.

1-4

help

you.

CHAPTER 2
TERMS AND CONCEPTS

This chapter describes the basic ADE terms and concepts.

2.1

SUMMARY OF ADE TERMS

The following is a brief list of the basic ADE terms and their
meanings.
You need to know them to use ADE most effectively.
Each term is described in more detail later in this chapter.

Worksheet

A "scratch-pad" that contains data in columns
and lines. Most of the ADE commands work on the
data in the worksheet.

Table

More permanent place to store data in columns
and lines.
The worksheet is saved as a table
for later use.

Value

A worksheet or table data entry.
A value
consists of one or more letters, numbers or
other characters, including spaces.

Line

A horizontal group of values in the worksheet or
a table.

Column

A vertical group of values in the worksheet or a
table.

Column Name

A name you give to a column. Use it in commands
to refer to and to work with a column.

Key Column

An optionally specified column that you may use
to keep the lines in the worksheet or a table in
order.

2-1

TERMS AND CONCEPTS
There are three more ADE terms and their meanings that you
should be aware of, although you need not understand them fully
to begin to use ADE. These terms are described in more detail
in other chapters.
Procedure

A set of ADE commands or other instructions
saved and used at a later time. A procedure has
the following characteristics:
•

It does not perform any operation unless you
use its name as you would a command name.

•

It can be reused many times.

•

It can be changed.

ADE has two types of procedures:

verbs and reports.

Verb

A procedure made up of ADE commands. Using the
name of a verb as you would a command name
causes all the commands in the verb to be used.

Report

A procedure made up of ADE instructions that
specify how the data in a worksheet or a table
is to be formatted. Using the name of a report
as you would a command name causes the data to
be formatted as you specified and output.

2-2

TERMS AND CONCEPTS
2.2

PARTS OF AN ADE TABLE

This illustration shows the several parts of the worksheet or
table:

PNAME

WHOUSE

P01
P02
P03
P 04

NUT
BOLT
SCREW
SCREW

W2
W2
W1
W2

P07
P08

GEAR
BEARING

W3
W2

P09

BOLT

( 1)
(2)
(3)
( 4)

Column name
Line
Value
Column

COLOR

+-------+
: RED
:
l GREEN l
: BLUE l
: RED
:

+-----+
+-----+
12
135

WEIGHT l QTY l (1)
17
17
14

167
48
1 43

GREY
GREY

9
25

234
136

l WHITE

+-------------------------------------------+
: P05 CAM
W1
l BLUE l
12
205 l (2)
+-------------------------------------------+
P06 COG
W3
RED
19
215
+-------+
( 4)

2-3

+----+
l 15 : (3)
+----+

TERMS AND CONCEPTS
2.3

HOW TO TELL ADE WHAT TO DO

ADE does what you tell it to do.
•

You can tell ADE what to do:

By entering commands
Entering commands is the main way in which you tell ADE what
to do.
Each ADE command tells ADE to perform a specific
operation. ADE is interactive, which means that after you
enter a command, ADE performs the specified operation and
tells you when it is finished. You can then enter another
command.
For example, here are three basic ADE commands and what they
do:

•

MAKE

Makes a new worksheet.

ENTER

Enters data into the worksheet.

SAVE

Saves the worksheet as a table.

By pressing function keys
Using function keys is another way in which you tell ADE
what to do. Most keys on the terminal act like typewriter
keys; they produce characters or perform an action such as
SHIFT or RETURN.
Other terminal keys, however, give ADE
special directions. For example:
<HELP>

Displays information.

<ENTER>

Indicates completion of an activity.

The ADE function keys save time when you are entering and
changing data and procedures. Instead of typing words, you
simply press a key.

2-4

TERMS AND CONCEPTS
2.4

HOW TO USE ADE IN YOUR WORK

office tasks, even the simplest ones, require you to
perform
several steps.
Consider this example.
You keep
employee data (name, address, telephone number) on index cards
in a file box.
The cards are kept in alphabetical order by
employee name. When an employee moves, you need to update the
information. First, you get the appropriate index card from the
file box. Then you erase the old address and telephone number
and type in the new address and telephone number. Then you put
the corrected index card back in its place in the file box.
This task requires four steps:
Mos~

Get

Erase

Type

Put

Like you, ADE works one step at a time.
Each ADE command
performs one step in a task. To complete a task, you usually
need to use several commands in the correct order. For example,
to change an employee's address and telephone number with ADE,
you use three commands:
1.

GET to get the employee data

CHANGE to change the address and telephone number

SAVE to save the changed employee data

When you work with ADE, you use a computer terminal instead of a
typewriter and keep your information in an ADE table instead of
on index cards. You can still do your work much as you do now,
but use ADE to save time and effort.
At first, work with ADE interactively; that is, enter commands
one at a time. You see the result of each command right away.
If you make a mistake, you can try again. When you are familiar
with the commands, you can start using verbs, which are groups
of commands. However, do not try using verbs when you first
start using ADE.

2-5

TERMS AND CONCEPTS
To help you get started, this guide shows you which ADE commands
to use for the basic tasks, like making a new worksheet and
saving it as a table. Once you learn how to use ADE for basic
tasks, you can decide which commands to use to help you in your
work.

2.5

HOW ADE STORES INFORMATION

When you store information in ADE, you use the worksheet and
tables. Both are made up of lines and columns and can contain a
key column.
A worksheet or table entry is called a value. A value consists
of one or more letters, numbers, or other characters, including
spaces. Some examples of values are:
•

A part number

•

A person's name

•

A date

Once stored, your data is handled by
outside ADE is normally unnecessary.

2.5.1

ADE

and

access

The Worksheet

When you first work with data, you begin with the worksheet.
The worksheet is like a scratch-pad. You can either make a new
worksheet or copy an existing table into the worksheet.
You
change the data in the worksheet using ADE commands. At any
point, you can save a copy of the worksheet or list a copy of
the worksheet. When you save the worksheet, you can save it as
a new table or replace an existing table with its contents.

2.5.2

Tables

Tables are the more permanent form of data storage in ADE.
You
save the worksheet in a table, giving it a table name so both
you and ADE can identify it. You can ask ADE to list the names
of your tables. You copy an existing table into the worksheet
to work with the data in it.

2-6

TERMS AND CONCEPTS

2.5.3

Key Column

A key column is a column that you can tell ADE to use to keep
all the lines in the worksheet or a table in order. For
example:
•

Keep employee data in alphabetical order
employee

•

Keep inventory data in order by part number

•

Keep invoices in order by date received

last

name

The worksheet or a table does not have to have a key column, but
each can have only one key column. A key column:
•

Does not allow duplicate values

•

Orders all lines by ascending (increasing) value

Duplicate values are values that ADE considers to be identical.
For example, ADE treats upper case and lower case letters the
Ascending
same. GEAR, Gear, and gear are duplicate values.
value
in key columns means that characters are kept in
alphabetical order, numbers are kept in numeric order, and dates
are kept in calendar order.
When you make a worksheet with a key column, you can enter lines
of data in any order. ADE automatically orders the lines based
on the key column values you enter and keeps you from entering
duplicate values into the key column. If you try to enter a
duplicate value into a key column, ADE rejects the value and
displays an error message.
You can make a worksheet without a key column, but some ADE
commands work better with key columns. Therefore, key columns
are important when you design tables for most efficient use by
ADE.

2-7

TERMS AND CONCEPTS
2.5.4

How ADE Stores Information On The Computer

ADE automatical~y sets up a storage area for you on your
computer's mass storage device, called a disk. This area is
your ADE account. In this manual, your ADE account is also
called your disk area or simply your area. Your ADE account is
part of your system account.

2.5.4.1

Inside ADE -

During an ADE session, you and other ADE users can identify your
ADE account by using the name or numeric code for your system
account. Your ADE account contains:
•

Your ADE directory, which is a list (by name) of your tables
and procedures

•

Your tables and procedures

Since both your ADE directory and your tables and procedures
take up disk space, and disk space is limited, you should erase
tables and procedures you no longer need. When using ADE, you
can display the names of tables and procedures in your ADE
directory at any time.

2.5.4.2

Outside ADE -

Your ADE directory, tables, and procedures are stored in files
in your system account. If you display your system directory,
you will notice that some file names in your system directory
end with ADE. These are your ADE files. Do not work with these
files outside of ADE. Especially, do not delete or selectively
restore any of these files from your system account. Although
your ADE files have special protection, you still could destroy
your tables, procedures and/or ADE directory with specific
sequences of operating system commands.

2-8

TERMS AND CONCEPTS
2.6

HOW ADE PROTECTS YOUR DATA

Under certain conditions, ADE allows other ADE users to list and
get copies of your tables and list and copy your procedures.
However, other ADE users cannot change your copies of your
tables or your procedures. ADE protects your data from other
ADE users by allowing:
1.

Only one person at a time to work with ADE in a specific ADE
account or area. For someone to use ADE in your area, they
must log in to your system account. They can start ADE only
if you are not using ADE.

Only you can change tables and procedures in your ADE
account or area.
If other ADE users have access to your
tables and procedures, they can list them on their terminal,
or they can copy them from your area into their area. They
cannot change anything in your area.
NOTE
To allow other ADE users access to your tables and
procedures, you must change the access word with the
ALLOW command. This command is more fully described
in later chapters.

2-9

CHAPTER 3
GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION

To help you get started, this chapter leads you through a sample
session using the basics of ADE, such as how to enter and use
some ADE commands and how to use the ADE function keys. It also
shows you how to use ADE's online tutorial.
During the sample session, you learn:

• How to start ADE

• Where inform at ion appears on the screen
• How to use the terminal keyboard
• How to enter ADE commands
• How to get help from ADE
• How to make and save a copy of the sample ADE table
• How to use the terminal in ADE for data entry
• How to exit ADE
Before you begin the sample session on your terminal, make sure
you have an account on your system and you know its name or
number and password.
This chapter contains both text and examples. Read the text of
each example before you try to type the ex ample on your
terminal. Type all text printed in red UPPER CASE exactly as
shown.

3-1

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION

3.1

STARTING ADE

Before you start the terminal session, make sure your terminal
is turned on and that the terminal's CAPS LOCK key is locked.
This makes your terminal session output match the examples shown
in this chapter.
You are now ready to start.
1.

Perform these steps:

Log in to your host system.
You may be asked for your user name or account number and
your password.
This step may not be required on all host
systems.

Wait for the host system prompt.
This may be a word, a single character or some form of menu
and indicates that the host system is ready to accept input.

Type input to start ADE.
You usually type ADE and press the RETURN key or indicate
the ADE menu choice. ADE takes a few moments to start up
and may print a message on the screen. Watch for the Ade:
prompt to appear near the bottom of the screen. When this
occurs, ADE is ready to accept input.

NOTE
If you do not know how to perform a step or cannot
complete it using the above instructions, use the
following checklist to help identify and correct the
problem.

•

Do you know how to do what you want to do?
If not, read the preceding sections of this guide again,
your host system user's guide, or talk to an experienced
user of your system for help.

3-2

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
•

Do you have an account on the system?
You must identify yourself to the system before you can use
ADE.
If you do not have an account, talk to your system
manager or the person in charge of issuing accounts.

•

Are there meaningless characters on your screen?
If so, talk to an experienced user of your system
because one of the following may be happening:
Your host system may not know the type of
are using

for

terminal

h~lp

you

Your terminal or system may not be working properly
The connection between your terminal and the system
be faulty
•

may

Does nothing at all happen on the VT100 screen when you type
on the keyboard?
If so, you may have pressed the NO SCROLL key without
knowing it.
Press this key once and type again. If still
nothing happens, your terminal or system is not working
properly or the connection between your terminal and the
system is faulty. Talk to an experienced user of your
system for help.

Is there a line of characters on your
• above
the line with the Ade: prompt?

VT100

screen

just

If so, your host system incorrectly expects your terminal to
be a VT52.
Talk to the system manager or an experienced
user of your system for help.
•

Have you typed all information correctly?
If not, perform the step
instructions.

again.

Computers

need

If you still cannot perform a step, see or talk to
experienced user of your system or the system manager.

3.2

specific

THE ADE TERMINAL

The ADE terminal will probably be a VT100 that has a display
screen and a keyboard with keypad. If it is not a VT100, read
Appendix B before you work through this sample session.

3-3

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
3.2.1

The ADE Screen

ADE organizes the screen into three areas:
1.

Scrolling area

Command area

Message area

See Figure 3-1.

+----------------------------------------------------------+
WELCOME

ADE

( 1)

--------------------------------------------d
i g i t a 1Ade:

(2)

ADE V2.1 starting at 10-Dec-82 10:15 AM.

(3)

* Enter a command, a Verb or Report name, or type HELP

+----------------------------------------------------------+
Figure 3-1:

3.2.1.1

ADE Screen Format

The Command Area -

Near the bottom of the screen is the Ade:
line beginning with an asterisk below it.
the command area.

3-4

prompt line and a
These two lines form

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
The Ade: prompt line is the command entry line, where you enter
commands. The Ade: prompt means ADE is ready for your input.
The second of these two command lines is the helping prompt
line. As you enter a command, this line helps you by displaying
what kind of information ADE needs from you.
This line's
message changes as you enter parts of a command and shows what
ADE expects from you. You will see the Working...
message,
command
statistics,
and other messages on this line at
appropriate times.

3.2.1.2

The Message Area -

The area on the screen immediately below the command area is the
message area.
When you first start ADE, this area usually
contains a message displaying the ADE version number, the date,
and the time when ADE was started. When you enter a command, a
name, or a value incorrectly, ADE displays an error message in
this area. When ADE needs information other than an ADE command
from you, it often displays a question in this area that you
must answer.
ADE also displays other helpful messages in this
area.
If ADE ever displays a message that instructs you to contact
your system manager, do so. A serious error may have occurred.
See Appendix C for a list of some possible messages.

3.2.1.3

The Scrolling Area -

The area above the line separating the command and message areas
from the rest of the screen is the scrolling area. In this
ar~a, you may see a message welcoming you to ADE or a display of
other information.
Depending on your system, these lines may
also be blank.
The scrolling area is your work area.
displaying information, for example:
•

The data in the worksheet

•

The worksheet outline

•

The names of your ADE tables

3-5

also

used

for

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
3.2.2

The Terminal Keyboard

Figure 3-2 shows a layout of the VT100 main keyboard.
See the
VT100 User Guide for a complete description of the keyboard.

: : : v l<--1-->:

lSETUPl

I
I ! I @ : # : $ I 3 : " : & : * : ( : ) : - : + I - lBlBl
I ESC: 1 I 2 I 3 : 4 I 5 : 6 : 7 l 8 : 9 l 0 l - : = : ' : S: K:
:
I
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
: { : } :
lTABl Q l W l E l R l T l Y l U l I l 0 l P l [ l ] l

lDELI

I
I
I
',
', CA PS II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
•
I
"
I RET
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
•
I
I
I
I
I
ICTRL l LOCK l A l S l D l F l G l H l J l K I L l ; l ' l
IBSLl

lNO :
:
:scRLlSHIFTl

: < : > : ? :
lLINEl
:sHIFTlFEEDl

z : x : c : v : B : N : M: ' : • : I
(SPACE BAR)

Figure 3-2:

3.2.3

VT100 Keyboard

Using The Keyboard

ADE accepts input in either upper case or lower case letters and
treats them both the same. However, while you are learning ADE,
it is best to keep the CAPS LOCK key down.
Keeping the
CAPS LOCK key down has these advantages:
•

Your data is consistent when displayed and printed.
All
table and column names, as well as all other names entered,
are in upper case.

•

ADE' s command line prompts appear in lower case; therefore,
it is easy to tell your input (printed in red upper case)
from ADE' s prompts.

All command examples in this guide show commands entered with
the CAPS LOCK key down. Your input is shown in red and upper
case; ADE's prompts are shown in lower case.

3-6

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
3.3

ADE'S ONLINE TRAINING

Before you begin this sample session, you'll find it interesting
to use ADE' s online training feature, a "hands-on" tutorial
which illustrates, step-by-step, how to use ADE. Here's how to
get started with ADE training:
When you successfully start ADE using the steps in the preceding
section, you see the "Welcome to ADE" screen (Figure 3-3) on
your terminal. The Ade: prompt is at the bottom of the screen.
Type TRAIN, then a carriage return, beside the Ade: prompt,
like this:
Ade:

TRAIN <RETURN>

.. and watch
what
happens!
ADE's
online
training
is
self-explanatory
just read and follow the directions on your
terminal screen to learn all about using ADE.

+----------------------------------------------------------+
ADE
Application Development Environment

+-----------------------------+
Welcome to the ADE
Basic User Training

+-----------------------------+
+-------------------------------------------------+
: Press Return to continue with the introduction. l
l Or, type ? and Return to skip the introduction. l

+-------------------------------------------------+
+----------------------------------------------------------+
Figure 3-3:

TRAIN Introduction Screen

3-7

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION

3.4

ENTERING COMMANDS

This section describes:
•

Fully prompted command entry

•

Defaults in command entry

•

Recovering from mistakes

3.4.1

Fully Prompted Command Entry

ADE helps you enter commands by prompting you for each piece of
information needed to complete the command. Enter each piece of
information and then press the RETURN key. This is called fully
prompted command entry.
Some commands are complete after you
enter one piece of information; others require you to supply
several pieces of information.
To start entering a fully prompted ADE command, type the command
name and press the RETURN key. If more input is expected, ADE
prompts you by displaying:
•

A word or phrase
expected input

the

command

line

•

The choices you have for the next input in
prompt line immediately below the command line

indicate

the

the . helping

Type the next input and press the RETURN key. Continue in this
way until ADE stops prompting you for more information. If all
the inputs you enter are correct, ADE carries out (executes) the
command.
During command entry, you can abbreviate command names and most
keywords to their first three letters, for example: NAM for
NAMES, WOR for WORKSHEET, and MUL for MULTIPLY.
You can correct typing mistakes by using the DELETE
you press the RETURN key.

key

before

If you want to stop entering a command and start the whole
command line over, use the CTRL/C combination: hold the CTRL
key down and press the C key.

3-8

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
To see how the command line changes as you enter a command, type
NAMES and press the RETURN key:
Ade: NAMES <RETURN>
Ade: NAMES of <ALL>
* Enter the word TABLES, VERBS, REPORTS, or ALL
ADE is prompting you for a word. Your alternatives are TABLES,
VERBS, REPORTS, and ALL.
The <ALL> is the default value for
this command.
Section 3.4.2 describes defaults.
Now, type
TABLES and press the RETURN key:
Ade: NAMES of <ALL> TABLES <RETURN>
Ade: NAMES of TABLES
Working ...
entire
command
is
After the command is completed, the
redisplayed
with
your
inputs.
When you see Working ...
displayed under the command line, ADE is now executing the
command.
You see a display listing the names of all tables in your ADE
directory. Since you are a new ADE user, you have no tables.
Now, enter the NAMES command again, abbreviating both NAMES
TABLES as shown:
Ade: NAM <RETURN>
Ade: NAMES of <ALL> TAB <RETURN>
ADE again displays the complete command and executes it.

3-9

and

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION

3.4.2

Defaults In Command Entry

Many command inputs have a default value. A default value is
the value ADE uses if you do not enter a different value. ADE
always displays its default values in angle brackets(<>).
To
select the default value, press the RETURN key. For example,
the NAMES command displays a list of the names of all tables,
verbs, and reports by default. To enter the default for the
NAMES command, first type NAMES and press the RETURN key:
Ade: NAMES <RETURN>
You see this prompt:
Ade: NAMES of <ALL>
* Enter the word TABLES, VERBS, REPORTS, or ALL
Now, to use the default ALL, press the RETURN key:
Ade: NAMES of <ALL> <RETURN>
Ade: NAMES of ALL
Working ...
After you press the RETURN key, you see the command redisplayed
and the Working...
message. The names of all tables, verbs,
and reports in your ADE directory are displayed. Since you are
a new ADE user, you have no names to display.

3.4.3

Recovering From Mistakes

You may make two kinds of mistakes during
can make:

command

entry.

You

•

An entry that does not conform to ADE's rules

•

An entry (such as a table name) that is correct according to
ADE's rules, but the named item, such as a table, does not
exist

When you enter commands one input at a time, ADE
piece of information 'for both kinds of errors.
type LSIT and press the RETURN key.

3-10

checks each
For example,

GETTING STARTED -( A SAMPLE SESSION
Ade: LSIT <RETURN>
ADE erases what you typed and displays this message:
ADE does not understand "LSIT".
ADE moves the cursor back to the Ade: prompt so you can start
over and enter the command intended, in this case the LIST
command.
If you ask ADE to get a table that does not exist, ADE again
recognizes an error. For example, type GET and press the RETURN
key:
Ade: GET <RETURN>
ADE displays:
Ade: GET table
* Enter an existing Table name
Now, type BUDGET and press the RETURN key:
Ade: GET table BUDGET <RETURN>
The table BUDGET does not exist. ADE erases what you last typed
on the command line and displays this message:
Cannot find a Table called "BUDGET".
ADE moves the cursor back so you
existing table. ADE displays:

can

enter

the

name

Ade: GET table
* Enter an existing Table name
Since there are no tables to get, press CTRL/C to cancel the
partially entered GET command.
ADE erases what was on the
command line so that you can enter the next command.

3-11

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION

3.5

OBTAINING HELP

Besides prompting you for each command input, ADE has two
methods of helping you to enter valid commands:
•

The HELP command

The HELP key

3.5.1

other

The HELP Command

Help is
The HELP command displays information about ADE.
available on many different subjects. Depending on what you
specify, ADE displays:
•

Some general information
getting more help

about

ADE

and

instructions

for

• In formation on keypad functions
• In form at ion on working with the worksheet
• Information on working with tables
• In form at ion on printing data
• Information on working with verbs and reports
• A list of all ADE help topics
• A 1 ist of all ADE commands
• In formation on specific ADE commands
Enter the following HELP command in two steps.
and press the RETURN key:

First, type HELP

Ade: HELP <RETURN>
ADE displays:
Ade: HELP me with subject <ADE>
*Enter a topic, an ADE command~ or just press the RETURN key.

3-12

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
To accept the default for HELP, press the RETURN key:
Ade: HELP me with subject <ADE> <RETURN>
ADE displays:
Ade: HELP me with subject ADE
You see this display in the scrolling area:
--------------------- Basic ADE operations --------------------Type:
TRAIN
HELP TABLES
HELP WORK
HELP SHOW
HELP VERBS
HELP REPORTS
HELP ?
HELP TOPICS
HELP KEYPAD

To find out about this:
- Training exercises if you are new to ADE
- Entering new data, or starting from scratch
- Working with existing data
- Printing data
Automating repetitive series of commands
- Printing data using ADE Reports
- List all ADE commands
- List topics you can get HELP about
- Where special functions are on the keyboard

The display lists other HELP commands that provide more detailed
information.
Try some of them. They are listed in unprompted
command entry form. In fully prompted command entry:
1.

Type HELP and press the RETURN key.

Type the subject listed after HELP and press the RETURN key.

For example, to display HELP text on TABLES:
Ade: HELP <RETURN>
Ade: HELP me with subject <ADE> TABLES <RETURN>
* Enter a topic, an ADE command, or just press the RETURN key.
ADE displays a list of commands to use in making a new table.

3-13

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
Now, enter a HELP command for one of the commands listed on
screen. The HELP command displays:
•

A paragraph or two about the command, including its
and results

•

Any optional phrases that can be used with the command

•

Other related HELP topics, if any

Continue typing other HELP commands in this way.
the HELP commands for GET and SAVE.

purpose

Be sure to try

You have now tried a number of HELP commands. As you work
ADE in the future, make use of the HELP command.

3.5.2

the

with

The HELP Key

ADE has a HELP key that you can press to display additional HELP
text. ADE's HELP key is the second key from the left in the top
row of the terminal keypad. On the VT100 terminal, the HELP key
is the PF2 key. (If you forget which is the HELP key, use the
HELP VT100 command.) See Figure 3-4 in Section 3.6.4 for a
layout of the VT100 keypad.
Use the HELP key whenever ADE expects input and you are not sure
what to enter.
Also use the HELP key when the prompts on the
command line and the helping prompt line do not give you enough
information.
When you press the HELP key after the Ade: prompt, you see the
default help display.
At all other times when ADE expects
input, pressing the HELP key causes the display of more detailed
information on what ADE currently expects from you. When you
enter a command, for example, you can use the HELP key to get
information about each command input. For example, type MAKE
and press the RETURN key:
Ade: MAKE <RETURN>
ADE displays:
Ade: MAKE new
* Enter the word COLUMN, WORKSHEET, VERB, or REPORT

3-14

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
Now, press the HELP key.
scrolling area:

This information is displayed

the

----------------- Keywords for the MAKE command ---------------COLUMN
WORKSHEET VERB
REPORT
-

Puts an empty column on the end of the worksheet
Leads you thru the making of a new worksheet
Lets you put ADE commands into a VERB
Lets you customize the format of a Table

You must tell the MAKE command what you want to MAKE

Now press CTRL/C to cancel this MAKE command.
After you have read the HELP text, you can use the DISPLAY
function to clear the screen and redisplay what was in the
scrolling area before you pressed the HELP key.
(To use the
DISPLAY function, press the PF1 key and then the PF2 key.)

3.6

USING THE TERMINAL IN ADE

If you have been working the examples in this chapter at your
terminal, you already know the basics of using the terminal in
ADE. This section describes how to use the terminal in more
detail
and
introduces you to data entry.
This section
describes:
•

Making the Worksheet PARTS

•

Saving the Worksheet PARTS

•

Entering More Data into the Worksheet PARTS

•

Using ADE Function Keys

3.6.1

Making The Worksheet PARTS

To make a sample worksheet called PARTS, follow the instructions
in this section exactly.
Do not be concerned if you do not
fully understand these instructions at this time.
There is a
more detailed description of making a worksheet in Chapter 5.

3-15

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
Type MAKE and press the RETURN key:
Ade: MAKE <RETURN>
ADE displays:
Ade: MAKE new
* Enter the word COLUMN, WORKSHEET, VERB, or REPORT
Type WORKSHEET and press the RETURN key:
Ade: MAKE new WORKSHEET <RETURN>
ADE displays:
Ade: MAKE new WORKSHEET called
* Enter a Table name
Type PARTS and press the RETURN key:
Ade: MAKE new WORKSHEET called PARTS
Working ...
ADE then prompts you for column names:
Type PN and press the RETURN key.
Type PNAME and press the RETURN key.
Type WHOUSE and press the RETURN key.
Type COLOR and press the RETURN key.
Type WEIGHT AS NUM and press the RETURN key.
Type QTY AS NUM and press the RETURN key.
Press the ENTER key on the keypad to end column name inputs.
Type PN and press the RETURN key to name
(Chapter 4 discusses key columns in detail.)

the

key

The worksheet now contains only the columns of the sample
table.

3-16

column.

PARTS

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
Now you will enter
numeric data.

3.6.1.1

two

kinds

data:

character

data

and

Entering Characters, Numbers, And Blanks -

To enter characters, use the letter and special character keys
on the main terminal keyboard. Do not press the ESCAPE, TAB,
BREAK, or BACKSPACE keys.
To enter numbers, use the number keys on the main keyboard.
Do
not use the number keys on the keypad at this time. The keypad
keys are used as special function keys, and are discussed in
Section 3.6.4.
To enter blanks into any type of column, press the RETURN key in
response to the prompt for the column.
As you type in data, use the DELETE key to correct typing
mistakes as they occur. When each column data value is correct
and complete, press the RETURN key.

3.6.1.2

Spacing Data -

ADE takes care of spacing data for you as you enter it.
ADE
also adjusts column widths to fit the values you enter. Do not
use the TAB key for spacing your data.

3.6.1.3

Entering The Data -

You are now ready to enter data into the worksheet.
The MAKE
command issues an implicit ENTER command. The screen displays
the worksheet column name prompts. The cursor is at the prompt
for the first column, PN:

This is the last line you entered:
PNAME
WHOUSE COLOR WEIGHT

PN •••••• ?
PNAME
?
WHO USE ?
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ?
QTY
?

3-17

QTY

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
To enter the first value for the PN column, type P01
the RETURN key.

and

press

The cursor moves to the next column prompt:
PN
? P01
PNAME ... ?
WHOUSE ?
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ?
QTY
?
To enter the first value for the
press the RETURN key:

PNAME

PN
? P01
PNAME ... ? NUT
WHOUSE ?
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ?
QTY
?
Type W2 and press the RETURN key:
? P01
PN
PNAME
? NUT
WHOUSE ? W2
COLOR ..• ?
WEIGHT ?
QTY
?

Type RED and press the RETURN key:
PN
? P01
PNAME
? NUT
WHO USE ? W2
COLOR
? RED
WEIGHT .. ?
QTY
?

(NUMERIC)

3-18

column,

type

NUT

and

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
The word NUMERIC appearing in parentheses means that only
numbers are allowed in this column.
Type 12 and press the
RETURN key:
PN
?
PNAME
?
WHOUSE ?
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ?
QTY ..... ?

P01
NUT
W2
RED
12
(NUMERIC)

Type 135 and press the RETURN key.
the RETURN key looks like this:
PN
?
PNAME
?
WHOUSE ?
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ?
QTY ..... ?

P01
NUT
W2
RED
12
135

The display before you press

(NUMERIC)

You have now entered one line into the worksheet.
ADE erases
the display of the values next to the column name prompts,
redisplays them at the top of the screen and prompts you to
enter another line of data.
Now enter in the following column values as shown,
line by pressing the RETURN key:
PN
? P02
PNAME
? BOLT
WHOUSE ? W2
COLOR
? GREEN
WEIGHT ? 17
QTY ..... ? 167

(NUMERIC)

PN
? P03
PNAME
? SCREW
WHOUSE ? W1
COLOR
? BLUE
WEIGHT ? 17
QTY ..... ? 48

(NUMERIC)

3-19

ending

each

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
PN
? P04
? SCREW
PNAME
WHOUSE ? W2
COLOR
? RED
WEIGHT ? 14
QTY ..... ? 143-

(NUMERIC)

PN
?
PNAME
?
WHOUSE ?
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ?
QTY ..... ?

P05
CAM
W1
BLUE
12
205-

(NUMERIC)

PN
?
PNAME
?
WHOUSE ?
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ?
QTY ..... ?

P06
COG
W3
RED
19
215-

(NUMERIC)

PN
? P07
PNAME
? GEAR
WHOUSE ? W3
COLOR
? GREY
WEIGHT ? 9
QTY ..... ? 234-

(NUMERIC)

PN
? P08
PNAME
? BEARING
WHOUSE ? W2
COLOR
? GREY
WEIGHT ? 25
QTY ..... ? 136-

(NUMERIC)

PN
?
PNAME
?
WHOUSE ?
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ?
QTY ..... ?

(NUMERIC)

P09
BOLT
W1
WHITE
5
15

Now press the ENTER key on the keypad to
WORKSHEET command. You see this message:

9 lines were ENTERED.

complete

the

You have 9 lines in your WORKSHEET.

3-20

MAKE

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
3.6.2

Saving The Worksheet PARTS

To save the worksheet PARTS after you make
press the RETURN key:

it,

type

SAVE

and

key.

ADE

Ade: SAVE <RETURN>
ADE displays:
Ade: SAVE worksheet as <PARTS>
To accept the default name PARTS, press the
displays:

RETURN

Ade:

SAVE worksheet as PARTS
Working ...
ADE also displays this message:
Enter a description for the Table:
Press the RETURN key.
ADE displays this message:
The WORKSHEET has been saved as Table "PARTS".
To see the contents of the worksheet, press the RETURN key:
Ade: <RETURN>
ADE displays the worksheet in the scrolling area:

PNAME

WHO USE

COLOR

WEIGHT

QTY

P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
P09

NUT
BOLT
SCREW
SCREW
CAM
COG
GEAR
BEARING
BOLT

W2
W2
W1
W2
W1
W3
W3
W2
W1

RED
GREEN
BLUE
RED
BLUE
RED
GREY
GREY
WHITE

12
17
17
14
12
19
9
25
5

135
167
48
143
205
215
234
136
15

3-21

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
To see information about the worksheet, type OUTLINE
the RETURN key twice.

and

press

Ade: OUTLINE <RETURN> <RETURN>
ADE displays:
Ade: OUTLINE of table WORKSHEET
Because the worksheet now contains a copy of the PARTS table,
the worksheet outline displays the same information that the
PARTS table outline does.

** OUTLINE OF WORKSHEET PARTS **
PN
PNAME
WHOUSK
COLOR
WEIGHT
QTY

(KEY)

(NUMERIC)
(NUMERIC)

There are 9 lines and 6 columns.

3.6.3

Entering More Data Into The Worksheet PARTS

In this section, use the ENTER command to enter more data into
the worksheet PARTS.
Make sure the Ade: prompt is at the
bottom of the screen. This tells you that ADE is ready to
accept input.
Type ENTER and press the RETURN key:
Ade: ENTER <RETURN>

3-22

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
ADE prompts you for a list of worksheet column names to use for
data entry.
You want to enter data into all the worksheet
columns, so press the RETURN key to accept the default, ALL:
Ade: ENTER new lines in worksheet using columns <ALL> <RETURN>
ADE displays:
Ade: ENTER new lines in worksheet using columns ALL
Working ...
The Working ... message shows you that ADE is executing the
Shortly, the worksheet column names appear on
ENTER command.
the screen. At the bottom of the screen, in the message area,
you see the function keys that are active during the ENTER
command.
When the cursor is next to the first column name, PN,
ready to enter more data into the existing worksheet:

This is the last line you entered:
PNAME
WHOUSE COLOR WEIGHT

P09

BOLT

WHITE

you

QTY
15

PN •••••• ?
PNAME
?
WHOUSE ?

COLOR
WEIGHT
QTY

?
?

NOTE
You may get this message:
There are NO columns in your WORKSHEET.
You have nothing in the worksheet to enter into (no
columns) and need to type the GET PARTS command followed
by the ENTER command.

3-23

are

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
Enter a value for each column. Type P20, LUG NUT, W3, YELLOW,
11, and 450; remember to press the RETURN key after each data
value entry.
The display before you press the
this:
? P20
PN
PNAME
? LUG NUT
WHOUSE ? W3
COLOR
? YELLOW
WEIGHT ? 1 1
QTY ..... ? 450

last

RETURN

key

looks

with

the

(NUMERIC)

You have now entered a new line
ENTER command.

into

the

worksheet

To complete the ENTER command, press the ENTER key on the
keypad. The following message is displayed in the message area:
1 lines were ENTERED.

You have 10 lines in your WORKSHEET.

To display the worksheet, press the RETURN key:
Ade: <RETURN>
ADE displays the new worksheet in the scrolling area.
new line you just entered at the end of the worksheet:

PNAME

WHO USE

COLOR

WEIGHT

QTY

P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
P09
P20

NUT
BOLT
SCREW
SCREW
CAM
COG
GEAR
BEARING
BOLT
LUG NUT

W2
W2
W1
W2
W1
W3
W3
W2
W1
W3

RED
GREEN
BLUE
RED
BLUE
RED
GREY
GREY
WHITE
YELLOW

12
17
17
14
12
19
9
25
5
11

135
167
48
143
205
215
234
136
15
450

3-24

See

the

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION

3.6.4

Using ADE Function Keys

This section introduces the ADE function keys you can use when
you make, enter data into, and change the contents of tables.
You have already used two ADE function keys, the HELP key and
the ENTER key.
Figure 3-4 shows where to find the ADE function keys on the
VT100 terminal keypad and arrow keys. Each key is labeled with
the function or functions it performs. You may make a copy of
this diagram and keep it at your terminal for quick reference,
or use the HELP VT100 command to display a diagram like it on
the screen.
(up) is the UP-ARROW key.
(down) is the DOWN-ARROW key.
(left) is the LEFT-ARROW key.
(right) is the RIGHT-ARROW key.

+-------+-------+-------+-------+
I UP
I DOWN I
I RIGHT I
: (up)
I TOP

l (down) : (left) : (right):
I BOTTOMI D.LEFTI D.RGHTl

+-------+-------+-------+-------+
+-------+-------+-------+-------+
l
HELP
UNDEL l
l
I PF 1
I GOLD

l PF 2 1 PF 3 I
l DISPLYI DEL.LNl

PF 4

l
l

+-------+-------+-------+-------+
INSERTl SKIP
FNDNXTl
7

I FIND

+-------+-------+-------+-------+
I

I
I
I
I
I

+-------+-------+-------+-------+
I

2
I

+-------+-------+-------+ ENTER
0

NUMS

+---------------+-------+-------+
Figure 3-4:

ADE Function Keys on VT100 Terminal

3-25

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
3.6.4.1

Standard And Alternate Functions -

Most function keys can perform two functions:
a standard
function and an alternate function. In Figure 3-4, the standard
function name is at the top of the key (such as HELP for the
HELP function) and the alternate function name is at the bottom
of the key (such as DISPLY for the DISPLAY function). The key's
most common keyboard label (such as PF2) is shown in the middle
of each key. To use a standard function, press the appropriate
key. To use an alternate function, press the GOLD (PF1) key and
then press the appropriate key. Release the GOLD key before you
press the function key.

3.6.4.2

Active Function Keys -

The standard HELP function key and the alternate DISPLAY
function key are always active during an ADE session. However,
all other ADE function keys are active only when you use certain
commands (MAKE, ENTER, CHANGE, SET). Different keys are active
for each of these commands. ADE displays the currently active
keys (in the message area) for each command when the command has
activated them.
For example, when you enter the MAKE WORKSHEET command,
active function keys for the MAKE command are displayed.

3.6.4.3

the

Repeating A Function -

You can repeat some functions several times by using the numbers
on the main keyboard along with the function keys on the keypad.
To repeat a function, press:
1.

The GOLD key on the keypad.

The number key or keys on the main keyboard to indicate
number of times to repeat the function.

The key or keys to perform the function.
For a standard
function,
press
the function key.
For an alternate
function, press the GOLD key and then the function key.

the

For example, you are actively involved in entering the names of
the worksheet columns in the MAKE WORKSHEET command. You have
entered five column names and have discovered
that
you
misspelled the second name. Press the GOLD key on the keypad,
then the 4 key on the main keyboard. Then press the UP function
key on the main keyboard. The cursor moves up four lines and
returns to the second column position so that you can now
correct the spelling error.

3-26

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION

3.6.4.4

Using The Keypad To Enter Numeric Data -

So far, you have entered numeric data into the worksheet by
using
the number keys on the main keyboard.
Sometimes,
especially when you need to enter a lot of numeric data, you may
want to use the keypad number keys. To do this, you need to
turn the keypad number keys "on" so that ADE knows to treat
numbers entered on the keypad as numeric values and not as
keypad functions. Press the GOLD key on the keypad, then the
ENTER key.
You can now use the keypad number keys to enter numeric values
in the worksheet. To return to using the keypad number keys as
function keys, press the GOLD key, then the ENTER key, again.
This turns "off" the keypad number keys for entering numeric
data and returns them to function keys.

3.6.4.5

Using Some Functions -

In this section, you use the CHANGE command to change some
values in the worksheet. You use the SKIP, DOWN, TOP, BOTTOM,
INSERT, FIND, and DELETE LINE function keys and repeat a
function.
If you press the wrong function key at any point in a sequence,
press CTRL/C to cancel the CHANGE command and start the sequence
from the beginning. CTRL/C cancels all changes you made to the
worksheet.
You need the worksheet PARTS that contains the sample PARTS
table data, including the line added with PN equal to P20. If
this data is not in the worksheet, get the sample PARTS table
into the worksheet and enter the extra line (see Section 3.6.3).
Now, enter the CHANGE WORKSHEET command, working through the
example.
Type CHANGE and press the RETURN key.
Press the RETURN key
again to accept the WORKSHEET default value. Press the RETURN
key a third time to accept the ALL columns default value.
Finally, press the RETURN key to accept the ALL lines default
value.
ADE displays:
Ade: CHANGE existing WORKSHEET columns ALL in lines WHERE ALL

3-27

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
ADE shows you the first line in the worksheet.
The active
function keys are displayed and the cursor is at the first
column name, PN:

This is the line you are changing:
PNAME
WHOUSE COLOR
WEIGHT

QTY

135

P01

NUT

RED

PN •••••• ?
PNAME
?
WHO USE ?
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ?
QTY
?

+/\ +- \/ -+-

I -uPI DOWN I

<- -+- -> -+PF1-+-PF2--+-PF3--+- 7 --+ 8 -+- 9 --+

I
I
I HELP IUNDEL IINSERTISKIPIFNDNXTI
ITOPIBOTTOMID.LEFTID.RGHTIGOLDIDISPLYIDEL.LNI
I
I FIND I

+---+------+------+------+----+------+------+------+----+------+

You now have several choices.

You can:

•

Enter new values to replace one
values in this worksheet line

•

Keep one or more of the current values in this line

•

Keep all of the current values in this line and move
the next line

•

Delete this line from the worksheet

•

Insert a new worksheet line before or after this line

3-28

the

current

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
You want to keep the current values on this first line and move
on to the next line. Press the SKIP function (8) key on the
keypad to move to the next line:

+-------+
SKIP
8
I

+-------+
After you press the SKIP function key, the second worksheet line
appears at the top of the screen and below it, the column name
prompts:

This is the line you are changing:
PNAME
WHOUSE COLOR
WEIGHT

P02

BOLT

GREEN

QTY
167

PN •••••• ?

PNAME
WHOUSE
COLOR
WEIGHT
QTY

?
?
?
?
?

You want to change the value in the COLOR column.
DOWN function (DOWN-ARROW) key three times.

+-------+
+-------+
+-------+
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN
I

l (down)

I
I

+-------+ +-------+

3-29

I
I
I

+-------+

The cursor moves to the COLOR column:
PN
? P02
PNAME
? BOLT
WHOUSE ? W2
COLOR ... ?
WEIGHT ?
QTY
?

Press

the

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
You can also move the cursor in another way using function keys.
Return to the original cursor position at the PN column prompt
by pressing the GOLD (PF1) key and then the TOP function
(UP-ARROW) key.

+-------+ +-------+
I

I (up)
l TOP

PF1
I GOLD

+-------+ +-------+
The cursor returns to the PN column:
PN ...... ?
PNAME
? BOLT
WHOUSE ? W2
COLOR
? GREEN
WEIGHT ?
QTY
?

Press the GOLD key, the 3 key on the main keyboard, and then the
DOWN function (DOWN-ARROW) key:

+-------+
I

I PF1
I GOLD

+-------+

<3>

+-------+
l DOWN l

l (down) I
I
I

I
I

+-------+

The cursor moves to the COLOR column:
PN
? P02
PNAME
? BOLT
WHO USE ? W2
COLOR ... ?
WEIGHT ?
QTY
?

3-30

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
Now, change the current value in the COLOR column from GREEN
a blank. Press the SPACE BAR, then the RETURN key:

? P02
PN
PNAME
? BOLT
WHOUSE ? W2
COLOR ... ? <SPACE BAR> <RETURN>
WEIGHT ?
QTY
?

To change the value in the QTY column, press the
then press the BOTTOM function key:

GOLD

key

and

To change the current numeric value in the QTY column
to 176, type 176 and press the RETURN key:

from

167

+-------+ +-------+
I

·:

PF 1

l GOLD

+-------+

l (down) l
:BOTTOM l

+-------+

The cursor moves to the QTY column:
? P02
PN
PNAME
? BOLT
WHOUSE ? W2
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ? 17
QTY ..... ?

(NUMERIC)

PN
? P02
PNAME
? BOLT
WHOUSE ? W2
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ? 17
QTY ..... ? 176 <RETURN>

(NUMERIC)

The third worksheet line now appears on the top of
followed by the column name prompts.

3-31

the

screen,

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
To insert a new worksheet line after the third line,
INSERT function (7) key on the keypad:

press

the

+-------+
INSERTl
I

I
I

+-------+
ADE asks:
Do you want to INSERT BEFORE this line of the Table?
Type NO and press the RETURN key.
ADE then asks:
Do you want to INSERT AFTER this line of the Table?
Type YES and press the RETURN key.
ADE displays:
This new line will be inserted AFTER this line of the Table.
ADE prompts you for values for each column. Type P03A, SCREW,
W2, BROWN, 6, and 654; remember to press the RETURN key after
each value entry.
Before you press the last RETURN
this:

PN
? P03A
PNAME
? SCREW
WHO USE ? W2
COLOR
? BROWN
WEIGHT ? 6
QTY ..... ? 654

key,

the

(NUMERIC)

3-32

screen

looks

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
Now, to find the worksheet line that contains the information on
cogs, press the GOLD key and then the FIND function (9) key:

+-------+
I

+-------+

l PF1
l GOLD

l
l

+-------+

:
l

9
:
FIND l

+-------+

In the message area, ADE prompts you to enter a
specifies the line to find:

condition

that

Find condition <WHERE ALL> ?
Since you want to find the line where the value in the PNAME
column is COG, type WHERE PNAME EQ COG and press the RETURN key:
Find condition <WHERE ALL> ?

WHERE PNAME EQ COG <RETURN>

After a short delay, ADE displays the worksheet line
for and again prompts you to change column values:

you

asked

PN ...... ?
PNAME
?
WHOUSE ?
COLOR
?
WEIGHT ?
QTY
?
Now erase this line by pressing the GOLD key and then the
DELETE LINE function (PF3) key:

+-------+ +-------+
I

l PF1
l GOLD

l
l

l PF3 l
l DEL.LNl

+-------+ +-------+

To complete the CHANGE command,
keypad.

3-33

press

the

ENTER

key

the

GETTING STARTED - A SAMPLE SESSION
If you want to see the worksheet, wait for the command
clear and press the RETURN key:

line

To exit from an ADE session, type EXIT and press- the RETURN
after the Ade: prompt on the command line:

key

Ade: <RETURN>
You see the changed worksheet displayed:

3.7

PNAME

WHOUSE

COLOR

P01
P02
P03
P03A
P04
P05
P07
P08
P09
P20

NUT
BOLT
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
CAM
GEAR
BEARING
BOLT
LUG NUT

W2
W2
W1
W2
W2
W1
W3
W2
W1
W3

RED

WEIGHT

QTY

12
17
17
6
14
12
9
25
5
11

135
176
48
654
143
205
234
136
15
450

BLUE
BROWN
RED
BLUE
GREY
GREY
WHITE
YELLOW

EXITING ADE

Ade: EXIT <RETURN>
ADE asks:
Do you really want to end this session (YES or NO)?
You can type NO or N to cancel the EXIT command or you can type
YES or Y to complete the EXIT command. If you type YES and
changed the current worksheet without saving the worksheet, ADE
asks:
Your Worksheet has not been saved and this command will lose any
changes you made. Should ADE do this command anyway (YES or NO)?
You can type YES or Y to completely exit ADE or you can type NO
or N to cancel the EXIT command at this point and allow you to
save the worksheet and continue using ADE.
Since you are now finished with this sample
ADE without saving the worksheet.

3-34

ADE

session,

exit

CHAPTER 4
ADE LANGUAGE RULES

ADE understands a language of words and symbols.
The ADE
language, although based on English, is simpler and more exact
than English.
For example, ADE understands MAKE, but not
CREATE.
In ADE, a word always has the same meaning, and only
one meaning is given to each word.
For example, combine and
merge have similar meanings in English, but in ADE the COMBINE
and MERGE commands perform distinctly different operations.
Just as there are rules for speaking and writing English, there
are rules for communicating with ADE. These rules are kept as
simple as possible.
This chapter contains rules relating to both commands and data.

4.1

RULES FOR NAMING COLUMNS, TABLES, AND WORKSHEETS

A column, table, or worksheet name:

•

Can contain only letters, numbers, and periods

•

Can be up to 16 characters long

•

Must start with a letter

•

Cannot end with a period

•

Cannot contain any spaces

Each worksheet you save as a table must be given a unique
name.
Columns must have unique names within each worksheet
or table.

4-1

ADE LANGUAGE RULES
4.2

ABBREVIATIONS

Column and table names cannot be abbreviated.
However,
commands and keywords used in ADE can be abbreviated.

all

Abbreviate the following, using the first three letters:
•

All commands

The general keywords WORKSHEET, TABLE, and COLUMN

The column keywords CHARACTER, NUMERIC, and DATE

•

The date keyword TODAY

•

The output keywords PRINTER, TERMINAL, DEVICE and PORT

The sorting keyword DESCENDING

•

Other keywords that are introduced in later chapters

Abbreviate YES and NO using only the first letter.

4.3

COLUMNS

The ADE worksheet and ADE tables
columns:
•

Character columns

•

Numeric columns

•

Date columns

4.3.1

can

contain

three

types

Character Columns

Character columns are the most flexible type of column.
They
can contain either character values or numbers on which you can
do arithmetic. ADE uses character columns when making a new
worksheet or adding a new column to an existing worksheet when
you specify only the new column name. Unless you want to do
arithmetic on dates, use character columns when you first begin
making worksheets.

4-2

ADE LANGUAGE RULES
Values in character columns can be any combination of letters,
numbers and other characters.
For example, these are valid
character column values:
SMITH
OUT OF STOCK
P-5600/A
359.21
30-Dec-81
The last two values could be entered into a numeric column and
and a date column, in that order. All the other values are
valid only in character columns.

4.3.2

Numeric Columns

Numeric columns can contain only numeric values.
When you
specify a column as numeric, ADE uses a default number format
pattern. You can change this format pattern using the SET
command;
however, we use only the default number format here.
For more information on how to change the default number format,
see the description of the SET command in Chapter 12.
Numeric values, using the default format for numbers, consist of
one or more numbers (the digits 0 through 9) typed from the main
keyboard when data is entered. A numeric value can optionally
have a leading plus (+) or minus (-) sign and a decimal point.
A numeric value cannot contain commas unless you use the SET
command to change the default number format (see Chapter 12).
You must limit a numeric value to 37 digits.
The following
examples show what kind of values, using the default format for
numbers, can be entered into numeric columns:
12
12.00
1425.00
-3489
5600
You could use all of these values in a
none of them are valid in date columns.

4-3

character

column,

but

ADE LANGUAGE RULES
4.3~3

Date Columns

Date columns can only contain date values.
Date values have
three parts:
day, month, and year. When you specify a column
as date, ADE uses a default date format. You can change this
format using the SET command; however, we use only the default
date format here. For more information on how to change the
default date format, see the description of the SET command in
Chapter 12.
Date values, using the default format, should be entered and are
displayed in the format dd-Mmm-yy (30-Dec-81). In this format,
dd means day, Mmm means month, and yy means year.
You must
enter a date value in the order day, month, year. You must also
enter either a space, a dash (-), or another nonletter and
nondigit character between the day and the month name and
between the month name and the year. If you do not enter the
year, ADE uses the current year in the system date. The
following examples show the ways you can enter the day, month,
and year:
Day

You type:

01
1
1
30

ADE displays:

1
1
1
30

Month

You type:

ADE displays:
Dec
dee
DEC
DECEMBER
December

Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec

Year

You type:

1981 ADE displays:
81
2000
(no year)

stores:
81
81
00
82 (current)

1981
1981
2000
1982

You can also use the keyword TODAY to enter the current date
into a date column.
When you enter TODAY, ADE enters the
current system date in the format dd-Mmm-yy. ADE does check the
validity of all dates entered into date columns and rejects a
nonexistant date (such as 31-Feb-82).

4-4

ADE LANGUAGE RULES

4.3.4

How To Define The Three Types Of Columns

The worksheet or a table can contain one, two, or all three
types of columns. You can restrict a column to numbers or dates
when you name a worksheet column using the MAKE WORKSHEET
command.
The MAKE WORKSHEET command prompts you for column
names. When you enter only a column name, ADE automatically
defines the column as a character column. To restrict the
column to numbers or to dates, type AS NUMERIC or AS DATE after
the column name.
You can use the same optional phrases when
using the MAKE COLUMN command to add a new column to the
worksheet.
For example, you want to store the following information
each of your employees in a table called PERSONNEL:
•

Employee name

•

Employee badge number (as a number)

•

Date hired (as a date)

•

Department

for

Enter the following MAKE command:
MAKE new WORKSHEET called PERSONNEL
When ADE prompts for column names, enter these names:
NAME <RETURN>
BADGE.NUMBER AS NUMERIC <RETURN>
DATE.HIRED AS DATE <RETURN>
DEPT <RETURN>

4.3.5

How To Use The Three Types Of Columns

ADE handles the three types of columns somewhat differently in
several kinds of operations.
Therefore, the column type is
important when you:
•

Perform arithmetic on data

•

Sort and retain data

•

Display and print data

4-5

ADE LANGUAGE RULES
After becoming familar with ADE, you should define a column
containing only numbers as a numeric column for the following
reasons:
•

When you enter data into a numeric column, ADE does not let
you enter anything but a numeric value, thus avoiding
incorrect data.

•

Although you can perform arithmetic on numbers in both
character and numeric columns, the results are more precise
for numeric columns. ADE gives you decimal fractions only
in results from numeric columns.
When you multiply or
divide numbers in character columns, the result is rounded
to the nearest whole number.

•

When you list a numeric column, all values in the column are
right-justified and are consistent in appearance. If you
enter any values with decimal points, ADE gives all values
in that column decimal points and the same number of decimal
places. Numeric values entered into character columns, on
the other hand, are left-justified and not aligned by
decimal points. For example:
Character

Numeric

12
12.00
1425.00
-3489
5600

12.00
12.00
1425.00
-3489.00
5600.00

If you want to perform arithmetic on dates, sort on dates, or
use date data as dates, you must define the column containing
dates as a date column. You cannot perform arithmetic on dates
in character columns. When you sort or otherwise use dates in a
character column, the results may not be what you want.
You can use the RENAME command to change character columns
numeric or date columns without reentering the data.

4-6

ADE LANGUAGE RULES
4.4

RULES FOR WORKING WITH KEY COLUMNS

A key column keeps all the lines in the worksheet or a table
order. A key column has two characteristics:
•

It does not allow duplicate values.

•

It orders all lines by ascending key column value.

your
To make sure
characteristics, you
with key columns:
•

key
must

columns
have
both
of
these
follow certain rules when you work

A numeric or date key column cannot contain more than one
blank entry, nor can a numeric key column contain both a
blank and a O, since both a blank entry and a O entry both
have the same numeric value.

The MAKE COLUMN command lets you add a column to the
• worksheet.
You can add a key column to a worksheet that
does not already have one and that contains one or no
(column names only) lines. However, you cannot add a key
column directly to a worksheet that contains more than one
line of data, since duplicate key column data values would
be present.
•

When you change any values in a key column with the CHANGE
command, the column is no longer a key column. To change
data values in a key column and maintain it as a key column:
Use the PICK command to get rid of all lines
want to change the key column value.

where

you

Use the ENTER command to reenter these lines.
•

If you perform an operation on a worksheet with a key column
that reorders the data or introduces duplicate values, the
column ceases to be a key column after the operation is
complete.

•

You can change a nonkey column to a key column or change a
key column to a nonkey column with the RENAME command. When
you enter the RENAME command, specify the phrase AS KEY or
AS NOKEY (or AS NONKEY) after the column name you are
changing. Before you use RENAME to change a nonkey column
to a key column, however, make sure the column has no
duplicate data values and that the data values are in
ascending order. Use the SORT command if necessary.

4-7

ADE LANGUAGE RULES
4.5

HOW TO SPECIFY WORKSHEET COLUMNS IN COMMANDS

Several ADE commands ask you to indicate which columns
The commands then act only on these columns.

use.

column

names

There are three ways to specify the worksheet columns:
•

A list of column names separated by commas

•

The keyword ALL

•

The keyword OMIT, followed
separated by commas

list

The keyword ALL means all columns. ALL is the default value for
most commands that require a column list.
The keyword OMIT followed by a column list causes the command to
act on all columns except those in the column list.
For example, you need a simple inventory listing of the data in
the worksheet that has six columns. However, you want to see
the data in only three of the columns. To limit the data that
you want to see, enter the following command:
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns PN,WHOUSE,QTY
You could also use the command:
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns OMIT PNAME,COLOR,WEIGHT
This example refers to the sample PARTS
PN,PNAME, WHOUSE,COLOR,WEIGHT and QTY.

4.6

table

with

columns

HOW TO SPECIFY WORKSHEET LINES IN COMMANDS

For some ADE commands, you must tell ADE which lines you want to
work on. For other commands, you have the option of specifying
particular worksheet or table lines.

4-8

ADE LANGUAGE RULES
There are three ways to specify the worksheet lines:
•

The keyword ALL

•

A WHERE phrase

•

An EXCEPT phrase

The keyword ALL means all lines. ALL is the default
most commands that require specified lines.

value

for

When a command allows lines to be specified, and most commands
do, enter the WHERE or EXCEPT phrase as part of the entry at the
end of the command.
A WHERE phrase specifies the worksheet lines to be used.
Only
lines that satisfy the WHERE phrase are used. An EXCEPT phrase
specifies the worksheet lines not to be used. Only lines that
do not satisfy the EXCEPT phrase are used.
A WHERE or EXCEPT phrase has four parts that you
following format:

enter

the

EXCEPT QTY

Keyword Column Operator Value
WHERE QTY LT 20 is an example of a WHERE phrase.
20 is an example of an equivalent EXCEPT phrase.

Keyword is the keyword WHERE or the keyword EXCEPT.
Column is the name of any column in your worksheet or the
keyword LINE.
The keyword LINE refers to the line position in
the worksheet.
Operator is one of the following:
Operator

Meaning

EQ or =
NE or <>
LT or <
LE or <=
GT or >
GE or >=
BT
BW
EW

Is equal to
Is not equal to (or is not)
Is less than (or is before)
Is less than or equal to
Is greater than (or after)
Is greater than or equal to
Is between the values
Begins with
Ends with
Contains

4-9

ADE LANGUAGE RULES
The BT operator specifies lines that have a value in the column
given or the value of the line number that is between the two
values given. The BW and EW operators specify lines that have a
character value in the column given that begins with and ends
with the character values given in that order. The CO operator
specifies lines which have a character value in the column given
that contains within it the character value given.
The BW, EW and CO operators work best on character columns. For
example, you can specify all lines with a character column
containing last names where the last name begins with S, ends
with SON or contains VON. For numeric columns, however, it is
best to use these operators only on numeric data saved in a
table. When you enter and change numeric data in the worksheet,
it may be displayed somewhat differently from the way you
entered it.
After you save the worksheet as a table, numeric
data is stored and displayed in the same format.
The use of
these operators on date columns is not fully supported.
Value is a group of characters or a number.
The following examples use the sample PARTS table:
•

You want to work with the inventory in Warehouse 2 (W2).
keep these lines in the worksheet, enter the command:

PICK columns ALL and lines WHERE WHOUSE EQ W2
•

Your company has stopped selling bearings.
To remove
information on bearings from your parts inventory, enter the
command:
PICK columns ALL and lines EXCEPT PNAME EQ BEARING

•

You would like to check on the quantity of all parts below
the minimum level point, which is 20. Enter the command:
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL WHERE QTY LT 20

•

You would like to see how many green parts and how many grey
parts there are. Enter the command:
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL WHERE COLOR BW GR

•

You would like to see the first five lines in the worksheet.
Enter the command:
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL WHERE LINE LE 5

4-10

CHAPTER 5
PRODUCING A TABLE

This chapter describes how to make a new ADE worksheet and
it as a table.

save

To make a new table:
1.

Use the MAKE command to name the worksheet
new columns.

and

define

the

Use the implicit
worksheet.

data

into

the

Use the LIST command to see the worksheet.

Use the CHANGE command to correct
entering data into the worksheet.

mistakes

made

when

Use the ENTER
worksheet.

new

into

the

Use the SAVE command to save the worksheet as the new table.

ENTER

command

enter

any

enter

data

The rest of this chapter describes how to perform each of these
steps to produce a new table called PERSONNEL that contains this
employee information:
•

Name

•

Badge number

•

Date hired

•

Department

The lines in the new table
name.

will

5-1

alphabetized

employee

PRODUCING A TABLE
5.1

MAKING A WORKSHEET AND DEFINING THE COLUMNS

5.1.1

Making A Worksheet

To make a new worksheet, type the MAKE command and press the
RETURN key. ADE prompts you for what you want to make, in this
case the worksheet. See Chapter 4 for rules on naming the
worksheet.
There is no default.
You must type the keyword
WORKSHEET and press the RETURN key. ADE then prompts you to
enter a name for the new worksheet. Type the name and press the
RETURN key. Use the name PERSONNEL. The following is displayed
on the command line:
MAKE new WORKSHEET called PERSONNEL
If you had any information in the worksheet prior to entering
the MAKE WORKSHEET command and you have modified it since it was
last saved, you will be so informed by ADE and asked whether or
not you want to continue with the MAKE command. If not, you can
answer NO to cancel the MAKE command. You can then save the
worksheet.
If you want to continue with the MAKE command,
answer YES.
If you had no previous information in
the
worksheet, you are not asked this question.

5.1.2

Naming The Columns

After the MAKE command is entered, ADE prompts you for column
names.
After each column name you type, press the RETURN key.
See Chapter 4 for rules on naming columns. Use the column names
of NAME, BADGE.NUMBER, DATE.HIRED, and DEPT. To restrict a
column to contain only numeric values or only date values, type
AS NUMERIC or AS DATE after the column name. You should do this
for the BADGE.NUMBER column and the DATE.HIRED column. When you
do not restrict a column by typing an AS phrase, the column is a
character column.
When you finish entering column names and the optional AS
phrases, press the ENTER key on the keypad after the prompt for
the next column.
Your input should be entered like this:
Column
Column
Column
Column
Column

1? NAME <RETURN>
2? BADGE.NUMBER AS NUMBER <RETURN>
3? DATE.HIRED AS DATE <RETURN>
4? DEPT <RETURN>
5? <ENTER>

5-2

PRODUCING A TABLE

5.1.3

Defining The Key Column

After you press the ENTER key on the keypad to indicate that you
are finished entering column names, ADE asks which column you
want to be the key column. NONE is the default. To specify a
key column, type the column name and press the RETURN key. Type
the column name NAME to make the NAME column the key column.

5.2

ENTERING DATA

At this point, the worksheet has columns but no data. The MAKE
WORKSHEET command issues an implicit ENTER command to allow you
to enter data into the worksheet. There is a key column in the
worksheet. Therefore, you can enter lines in any order and they
are ordered by the values entered into the NAME column, which is
the key column. You also cannot enter any duplicate values into
the NAME column, since it is the key column.
ADE clears the screen and displays the worksheet column names.
A question mark follows each column name. A row of dots is at
the first column, between the column name and the question mark.
This row of dots and the cursor always appear at the column
awaiting your data. The cursor waits at the first column for
your data.
Here is how the screen looks before you start
entering data:
NAME •••••••••• ?

BADGE.NUMBER
DATE.HIRED
DEPT

?
?
?

Enter a value for each column. Use the DELETE key to correct
typing mistakes.
Press the RETURN key to move to the next
column. If you want to enter a blank value into a column, press
only the RETURN key for that column entry. The row of dots
moves from column to column as you enter values.
Here is how
the screen looks as you enter values:
NAME
BADGE. NUMBER
DATE.HIRED

? JONES
? 4

? 2-Jan-80

DE PT • ••••••••• ?

5-3

PRODUCING A TABLE
If any of the columns are restricted to numbers or dates, the
prompt line includes either the word NUMERIC or the word DATE.
You must enter the correct kind of value.
If you enter an
incorrect value, ADE:
•

Erases the incorrect value

•

Prints an error message, including the incorrect data

•

Moves the cursor back to the beginning of the column so
can reenter the value correctly

you

When you finish entering values in all the columns, you have
entered one line of data into the worksheet. The data just
entered is moved from the entry locations to the top of the
screen.
ADE is ready for the next line of data to be entered.
You continue entering data line by line.
Some function keys on the keypad and the arrow keys are active
while you enter data. The active function keys are displayed at
the bottom of the screen. Besides the HELP function, DISPLAY,
SKIP, UP, DOWN, TOP, and BOTTOM are other functions you may find
useful.
When you finish entering data into the worksheet, press the
ENTER key after the first column prompt the next time the column
names are displayed, as shown.
This completes the implicit
ENTER command and returns you to the Ade: command prompt.
NAME .......... ? <ENTER>
BADGE.NUMBER ?
DATE.HIRED
?
DEPT
?

5.3

LISTING THE WORKSHEET

Use the short form of the LIST command to display the worksheet
in the format of a table. To do this, press the RETURN key at
the Ade: command prompt. Note that the key column name is
underlined. A similar display is shown in the scrolling area:
NAME

BADGE.NUMBER

DATE.HIRED

DEPT

2
1

12-Jun-79
17-Mar-79
22-Aug-79
2-Jan-82

SALES
SALES
MFG
MFG

CARTER
CLANCY
D'ANGELO
JONES

3
4

5-4

PRODUCING A TABLE
When the worksheet has many lines, you can use the NO SCROLL key
to stop and restart the scrolling of data.
When the worksheet is too wide to fit on the screen, use the
long form of the LIST command. Request to see only groups of
the columns that will fit on the screen at one time.
If you
request all columns, the data in a line not fitting on the
screen is wrapped to the next line.

5.4

CHANGING DATA

Use the CHANGE command to correct mistakes made in data entry.
Specify individual columns and specific lines for selective
changes.
The specified columns are listed, and only the
specified lines are successively presented for change. The
CHANGE command format is exactly like the ENTER
format,
including the display of active function keys at the bottom of
the screen. The additional INSERT, DELETE LINE, UNDELETE, FIND,
and FIND NEXT functions may be useful when making changes. If
no changes are required, do not use the CHANGE command at all.

5.5

ENTERING MORE DATA

You may discover new data that you want to include as part of
the worksheet before you save it. In this case, use the ENTER
command. The command line displays:
ENTER new lines in worksheet using columns ALL
ADE clears the screen and displays the worksheet column names,
as described above.
The last line in the worksheet is also
displayed at the top of the screen.
Enter values for each
column for each line that you are prompted to enter, exactly as
you entered the original data. When finished, press the ENTER
key on the keypad to complete the ENTER command.
If no
additional data is needed, do not use the ENTER command at all.

5-5

PRODUCING A TABLE

5.6

SAVING THE WORKSHEET AS A TABLE

When you have entered all data correctly, use the SAVE command
to save a copy of the worksheet as a table. Since the worksheet
was named PERSONNEL, the default table name for the SAVE command
is PERSONNEL.
After entering the SAVE command, command line
displays:
SAVE worksheet as PERSONNEL
Because SAVE can overwrite existing tables, you get a chance to
stop the command, if a table already exists with the same name.
After you pressed the RETURN key following the table name, if
you already have a table named PERSONNEL, for example, ADE asks
you whether you want to replace the existing PERSONNEL table
with the worksheet. Answer YES if you want to replace the table
with the worksheet; answer NO to stop the SAVE command.
After the SAVE command is complete, ADE displays:
The WORKSHEET has been saved as Table "PERSONNEL".
The table PERSONNEL now contains exactly what
PERSONNEL contains, the data you just entered.

5-6

the

worksheet

CHAPTER 6
WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET

After you save a table, you can work with it to:

• Enter new data
• Change data
• Reorder data
• Selectively group data
• Perform arithmetic on data
• Graph data
• Prepare data for a report
This chapter describes how to work with tables and
the
worksheet, as well as how to effectively design tables for use
by ADE. Many commands are shown by example.
For a complete
description of each command, see Chapter 12.

6.1
6.1.1

USING EXISTING TABLES
Displaying The Names And Outlines Of Tables

Use the NAMES command to find out what tables exist in an ADE
user area.
After you enter the NAMES command specifying table
names, the command line displays:
NAMES of TABLES

6-1

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
A list of currently existing table names displays in the
scrolling area. You then can use the OUTLINE command to display
the outlines of tables. If the table you want is the PARTS
table, then use the OUTLINE PARTS command to display its
outline. The command line displays:
OUTLINE of table PARTS
You can also use the LIST command to display the tables.
For
example, use the LIST PARTS command to display the table PARTS.
The command line displays:
LIST existing PARTS columns ALL

6.1.2

Getting A Table Into The Worksheet

Before you can work with the data in an ADE table, you must use
the GET command to transfer a copy of the table into the
worksheet. Remember, the worksheet contains an exact copy of
the table, not the table itself. Do not worry about making
mistakes or ruining the data in the table because you make
changes only to the worksheet. If you make a mistake, you can
start over by using GET to copy the table into the worksheet
again.
If you want to work with the PARTS table data, use the
GET PARTS command to get the data into the worksheet:
GET table PARTS

6.1.3

Listing The Worksheet On The Terminal

After you copy a table into the worksheet, you can use the
OUTLINE
WORKSHEET command to display the outline of the
worksheet, as well as use the short form of the LIST command
(the RETURN key pressed at the command prompt) to display the
worksheet.
Use the short form of the LIST command often
session to see what the worksheet looks like.

6-2

during

ADE

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
6.1.4

Listing The Worksheet On The Printer

When you want to list the worksheet on paper instead of on the
screen, use the LIST WORKSHEET command and add the optional
phrase TO PRINTER at the end of the command input. For example:
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL TO PRINTER

6.1.5

Listing Lines In The Worksheet

ADE numbers your worksheet lines in an "invisible" column called
LINE.
You can display these line numbers, along with your
worksheet lines, with the LIST command followed by the keyword
LINE. At the end of the LIST command line, type LINE,ALL to see
line numbers for lines in all columns. For example:
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns LINE,ALL
You see the line numbers displayed at the left of your worksheet
in a column called LINE:
LINE

PNAME

WHOUSE

COLOR

WEIGHT

QTY

1
2
3
4

P01
P02
P03
P04

NUT
BOLT
SCREW
SCREW

W2
W2
W1
W2

RED
GREEN
BLUE
RED

12
17
17
14

135
167
48
143

You can also type LINE followed by a list of column names to see
line numbers for lines in only those columns you specify.

6-3

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
6.1.6

Saving The Worksheet As A Table

At any time during an ADE session, you can save a copy of the
worksheet as a table with the SAVE command. SAVE copies the
worksheet into a table. The table is either a new one with a
new name or an update to an existing one.
For example, to save the worksheet with the PARTS table data
unchanged in a new table called NEWPARTS, use the SAVE command
and enter the new table name after the default <PARTS> prompt
and press the RETURN key. The command line displays:
SAVE worksheet as NEWPARTS
To replace the original PARTS table with new PARTS data in the
worksheet, use the SAVE command and press the RETURN key after
the default <PARTS> prompt. The command line displays:
SAVE worksheet as PARTS
You must confirm that you want to replace the PARTS table with
the contents of the worksheet. This confirmation is a built-in
protection to keep you from losing important data.

6. 2

ENTERIN'G NEW DATA INTO THE WORKSHEET

There are two ways to add new data to the worksheet:
•

Add new lines

•

Add new columns

6.2.1

Adding New Lines

The simplest way of adding new lines to the worksheet is the
ENTER command.
A more advanced way of adding new lines to the
worksheet is using the MERGE and APPEND commands, which are
introduced in Chapter 8. For now, use the ENTER command to add
new lines to the worksheet. After typing the ENTER command, the
command line displays:
ENTER new lines in worksheet using columns ALL

6-4

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
6.2.2

Adding New Columns

To add a new column to the worksheet, you can:
•

Make a new column with the MAKE command and then enter
into the new column with the CHANGE command

data

•

Place a value in every line of a
MOVE command

the

•

Copy all values from one worksheet
created with the MOVE command

•

Place the results of an arithmetic command in every line
a column created by the arithmetic command

column

created

column

into

with
a

column
of

A more advanced way to add new columns to the worksheet is using
the COMBINE command, which is introduced in Chapter 8. For now,
use MAKE and CHANGE to add a new column to the worksheet, as
shown in the following example:
To add a new column named PRICE to the worksheet, enter the MAKE
COLUMN command. ADE displays:
MAKE new COLUMN called PRICE
The column PRICE is now in the worksheet.
Now you need to put data into the PRICE column by using the
CHANGE command.
To put data into column PRICE in all lines,
enter the CHANGE WORKSHEET command. ADE displays:
CHANGE existing WORKSHEET columns PRICE in lines WHERE ALL

6-5

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
ADE now prompts you for the new values. Enter a value for PRICE
and press the RETURN key. ADE then displays the next worksheet
line and prompts you for the next value. Use the DELETE key to
correct typing mistakes as you enter new values. Remember, the
bottom of the screen displays the active function keys.
ADE continues to display lines and to prompt you for new values
until you either enter a value for every line in the worksheet
or press the ENTER key on the keypad.
When you see the Ade: command prompt, press the RETURN key to
display the new values just entered. If you entered any values
incorrectly, use the CHANGE command to correct them.
The following examples show how to use MOVE and SUBTRACT to
a new column to the worksheet.

add

Example:
You want to keep track of the date of the latest update of your
product to its contracted customers.
You sent an update to
everyone on 30-Dec-82. Move the given date (30-Dec-82) to a new
column called BASE.DATE in the worksheet that contains the list
of your customers. Enter the MOVE command. ADE displays:
MOVE from 30-Dec-82 to column BASE.DATE
Assuming BASE.DATE column did not exist in the worksheet before
the MOVE command was entered, a new column with that name is now
added to the worksheet, and each line contains the specified
date. The column is automatically a date column.
Example:
Move the existing values in a column called CURRENT.YEAR to a
new column called LAST.YEAR in the same worksheet. Enter the
MOVE command. ADE displays:
MOVE from CURRENT.YEAR to column LAST.YEAR
Assuming a column called CURRENT.YEAR does exist in
the
worksheet and a column called LAST.YEAR does not exist in the
worksheet before the MOVE command was entered, a new column with
that name is now added to the worksheet, and each line contains
the corresponding value from the existing column. The column is
the same type as the existing column.

6-6

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
Example:
You need to compute new lowest price limits for a sale with $100
rebates.
Subtract 100 from the existing values in a column
called LIMIT; put the result in a new column called NEW.LIMIT.
Enter the SUBTRACT command. ADE displays:
SUBTRACT item 100 from LIMIT result in column NEW.LIMIT
Assuming a column called LIMIT does exist in the worksheet and a
column called NEW.LIMIT does not exist in the worksheet before
the SUBTRACT command was entered, a new column with that name is
added to the worksheet, and each line contains the result of the
subtraction. The new column is a numeric column.

6.3

CHANGING DATA

By using the CHANGE and RENAME commands, data can be changed
the worksheet.

6.3.1

Changing Data Values

The CHANGE command is the basic command to change data values in
the worksheet.
Use the CHANGE command to change values one by
one at specified places in the worksheet.
When you enter the CHANGE command,
which lines you want to change.
value that you specified.

6.3.2

specify which columns and
ADE prompts you for each new

Renaming A Column Name Or Type

The RENAME command changes the name or type of a column.
(Remember that a column can be character, numeric, or date. A
column can also be key or nonkey.) To change a column's type,
the column must contain the correct kind of data and, if it is
to become a key column, must be in the correct order. To change
a column from nonkey to key, the column values must be in
ascending order and the column cannot contain duplicate values.
To change a character column to a numeric column, the column
must contain only numbers. To change a character column to a
date column, the column must contain only date values.

6-7

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
Example:
You want to rename the worksheet column PN to PARTNO.
the RENAME command. ADE displays:

Enter the

RENAME existing PN to column PARTNO
Example:
To change PRICE to a numeric column, enter the
ADE displays:

RENAME

command.

reorder

worksheet

RENAME existing PRICE to column PRICE AS NUMERIC

6.4

REORDERING DATA

By using the SORT and PICK commands, you can
lines and worksheet columns.

6.4.1

Reordering Lines

The SORT command reorders lines.
It arranges all worksheet
lines in either ascending or descending order based on the
values in a specified column or a list of columns.
For this example, use the GET PARTS command
table data into the worksheet again.

get

the

PARTS

In PARTS, all lines are ordered by part number (the PN column).
Suppose you want to reorder the lines by the warehouse (the
WHOUSE column). Enter the SORT command. ADE displays:
SORT by columns WHOUSE
Now list the worksheet:

PNAME

WHOUSE

COLOR

WEIGHT

QTY

P03
P05
P09
P01
P02
P04
P08
P06
P07

SCREW
CAM
BOLT
NUT
BOLT
SCREW
BEARING
COG
GEAR

W1
W1
W1
W2
W2
W2
W2
W3
W3

BLUE
BLUE
WHITE
RED
GREEN
RED
GREY
RED
GREY

17
12
5
12
17
14
25
19
9

48
205
15
135
167
143
136
215
234

6-8

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
Note that:
•

All lines are now in order by warehouse number.

•

The lines are no longer ordered by part number;
therefore,
PN is no longer a key column (underlined) if it was one
before the sort.

You can sort lines using several columns with one SORT command
by specifying the column names separated by commas in the
command. You can also sort values in descending order by
including the optional keyword DESCENDING as part of the last
command entry input. See Chapter 12 for more information.

6.4.2

Reordering Columns

The PICK command reorders columns in the worksheet.
PICK
prompts you for a list of columns. List the column names from
left to right in the order you want them to appear, separated by
commas.
Example:
Assume the worksheet columns are now in the order:
PN, PNAME,
WHOUSE, COLOR, WEIGHT, QTY. Use the PICK command to change the
order to PN, WHOUSE, QTY, PNAME, COLOR, WEIGHT. Enter the PICK
command. ADE displays:
PICK columns PN,WHOUSE,QTY,PNAME,COLOR,WEIGHT and lines
WHERE ALL
The worksheet outline shows the new column order, as follows:

** OUTLINE OF WORKSHEET PARTS **
PN
WHO USE
QTY
PNAME
COLOR
WEIGHT

(NUMERIC)
(NUMERIC)

There are g lines and 6 Columns.

6-9

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
6.5

SELECTIVELY GROUPING DATA

The PICK command selectively groups data from the worksheet by
asking you to specify columns and lines. When you use PICK, you
can specify both columns and lines with one command.
Use the PICK command to remove lines and columns that you no
longer want. PICK keeps only the columns and lines you specify
and discards the rest of the worksheet.
The following example shows how to use PICK on the PARTS table
data to produce selectively grouped data in the worksheet.
You want to see the quantity of each part in Warehouse 1.
To
selectively keep this data in the worksheet, enter the PICK
command. ADE displays:
PICK columns PN,WHOUSE,QTY and lines WHERE WHOUSE EQ W1
List the worksheet:

6.6

WHOUSE

QTY

P03
P05
P09

W1
W1
W1

48
205
15

PERFORMING ARITHMETIC ON DATA

This section describes basic arithmetic commands. You can also
do arithmetic with the CALCULATE command, which is introduced in
Chapter 8.
These six ADE commands perform simple arithmetic:

• ADD
• SUBTRACT
• MULTIPLY
• DIVIDE
• TOTAL
• TALLY
6-10

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
These six commands fall into two groups.
The first group
consists of ADD, SUBTRACT, MULTIPLY and DIVIDE. The second
group consists of TOTAL and TALLY.
The first group of four commands performs arithmetic on:
•

The corresponding values in two columns

•

The values in one column and a given value

•

Two given values

When you specify two columns or a column and a value, all four
of the commands in the first group place the result of the
arithmetic in a new or an existing worksheet column.
When you
specify two values, the result displays in the scrolling area.
The second group of commands performs arithmetic on
within vertical columns.

the

values

TOTAL adds up all the values within one or more columns.
It
places the result or results in the column or columns on a new
line at the bottom of the worksheet.
TOTAL can also produce
subtotals on one or more columns. TOTAL places these results in
the column or columns on new lines at the points of change.
TALLY produces a running total on a worksheet
the results in a new or an existing column.

column,

placing

In the examples that follow, the MULTIPLY command shows how
commands in the first group work. Th~ TOTAL command and the
TALLY command show how both commands in the second group work.
These simple examples show basic operations only. See Chapter
12 for more detailed information on all six commands.
Example:
Assume this data is in your worksheet:
PN

WHOUSE

QTY

PRICE

P03
P05
P09

W1
W1
W1

48
205
15

.05
.03
.01

Use the MULTIPLY command to multiply QTY by PRICE to get the
total value at the given price for each part. Specify a column
named TOTAL.VALUE for the result. Enter the MULTIPLY command.
ADE displays:
MULTIPLY item QTY by PRICE result in TOTAL.VALUE

6-11

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
List the worksheet:

WHOUSE

QTY

PRICE

TOTAL. VALUE

P03
P05
P09

W1
W1
W1

48
205
15

. 05
. 03
. 01

2.40
6. 15
. 15

Example:
Assuming the same data as the previous exampl~, use the TOTAL
command to find the total quantity of the parts and the grand
total value for all three parts. Enter the TOTAL command.
ADE
displays:
TOTAL on columns QTY,TOTAL.VALUE subtotal by NONE
List the worksheet:

WHOUSE

QTY

PRICE

TOTAL.VALUE

TOTAL*

P03
P05
P09

W1
W1
W1

48
205
15
268

. 05
. 03
. 01

2.40
6. 15
. 15
8.70

TOTAL

As you can see, there are 268 parts worth a total of $8.70. The
TOTAL* column is useful in making more complex reports, which
are introduced in Chapter 10.
Example:
Assuming the same data as in the previous two examples, use the
TALLY command to find the running total of the TOTAL.VALUE
column. Enter the TALLY command. ADE displays:
TALLY on column TOTAL.VALUE starting at O result in column
RUN.TOTAL

6-12

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
List the worksheet:

WHOUSE

QTY

PRICE

P03
P05
P09

W1
W1
W1

48
205

. 05
. 03

• 01

TOTAL.VALUE

RUN.TOTAL

2.40

2.40
8.55
8.70

6. 15
. 15

As you can see, TALLY produces the same total of $8.70.

6.7

GRAPHING DATA

A graph can be an effective way to present data. With the GRAPH
command, you can produce simple bar graphs of your worksheet
data that show one worksheet column in relation to another.
ADE prompts you for two column names.
The first column you
specify must contain numeric values.
This column is the
vertical axis of the graph. The second column you specify can
contain any kind of data. This column is the horizontal axis of
the graph.
You can display the graph on the screen or print the graph on
the line printer using the optional phrase TO PRINTER at the end
of the command input. Chapter 7 describes how to copy the graph
into a file so that you can use the graph in a report.
The following example uses the PARTS data in a graph.
Example:
Suppose you want to produce a graph on the screen to show the
relative quantity of each part by graphing the QTY column in
relation to the PN column.
Since the QTY column contains
numbers and the PN column contains characters, specify QTY as
the vertical axis column and PN as the horizontal axis column:
GRAPH vertical column QTY versus horizontal column PN

6-13

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
ADE displays:
Bar graph of QTY versus PN
280
240
200
160
120
80
40

x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x

----------------------------------P01 P02 P03 P04 P05 P06 P07 P08 P09
6.8

PREPARING DATA FOR A SIMPLE REPORT

You can produce simple ADE reports using the commands you
already know.
For example, you can get the data into the
worksheet, sort it, or produce totals and tallies. You can then
use the LIST command to display or print the worksheet.
The following example shows how to prepare and produce a
report.
Use the MAKE command to make a new
that contains the following data:
PN

WHOUSE

QTY

P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04

W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
w3
W1
W2
W3

128
135
142
92
167
251
48
74
10
65
143
202

6-14

worksheet

called

simple

INVENTORY

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
The worksheet now contains:
•

Duplicate part numbers in the PN column

•

Lines ordered (sorted) by two columns:

PN and WHOUSE

Now enter this TOTAL command:
TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN
List the worksheet:

WHO USE

QTY

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02
P03
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04
P04

W1
W2
W3

128
135
142
405
92
167
251
510
48
74
10
132
65
143
202
410
1457

W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3

TOTAL*

PN
TOTAL

The TOTAL command inserts a new worksheet
value of PN changes. TOTAL also:

line

each

time

the

subtotal

line

•

Produces subtotals for each part number (PN)

•

Produces a column total

•

Adds a TOTAL* column to the worksheet

•

Puts the subtotal column name PN on each
the new TOTAL* column

•

Puts the word TOTAL on the total
column

line

the

new

TOTAL*

This simple reporting format satisfies many of the simple
reporting needs of many users. See Chapter 10 for information
on how to produce more complex reports.
6-15

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET

6.9

DESIGNING TABLES FOR MOST EFFECTIVE USE BY ADE

ADE works best on small tables.
Keep
tables instead of large ones because:
•

The ADE commands work faster

•

You can display
" wr a pp in g "

all

your

data

information

the

This section suggests size limits for ADE tables
how you can work within these size limits.

6•9• 1

small

screen

without

and

describes

Co 1 um n s

An ADE table can contain no more than 25 columns, so that most
of the time you can list all your data without wrapping. ADE is
designed for use mainly on video terminals that display 80 or
132 characters per line.
Lines longer than 132 characters
result in "wrapped" lines that can be hard to read.

6.9.2

Lines

ADE's speed depends mainly on the number of lines in a table and
not on the number of columns. Most ADE commands, especially
SORT, work faster on small tables than on large tables.
Although ADE can handle tables up to 1,000 lines, limit ADE
tables to fewer than 250 lines when
working
with
ADE
interactively.
Also consider how you plan to use ADE. Speed is more important
when you use ADE interactively than when you use verbs. When
you use ADE interactively, you must wait for a command to finish
before entering the next command. On the other hand, when you
use verbs, you can leave your terminal and do other work while a
verb is running. If you plan to use verbs, you can make tables
up to 1,000 lines long.

6. 9. 3

How To Design Tables

Store data in small related tables instead of
with many columns and lines.

6-16

large

tables

WORKING WITH TABLES AND THE WORKSHEET
Different tables can be related in one of two ways:
•

They have exactly the same columns.

•

They have one column that is the same, preferably
column, but the rest of their columns are different.

key

Having exactly the same columns in tables means that the columns
match one for one in name and type, but not necessarily in data
values.
When you store data in related tables, you can use the more
powerful commands introduced in Chapter 8. These commands can
bring data from several tables into the worksheet when you need
to work with larger amounts of data.

6-17

PART TWO - USING MORE OF ADE

CHAPTER 7
OPTIONAL PHRASES

This chapter describes optional phrases that you can add to ADE
commands to make them work differently. For example, most ADE
commands you have used so far display their output on your
terminal screen;
however, the optional TO phrase can send the
output of some of these commands to a printer or a file instead.
This chapter describes:
•

WHERE and EXCEPT phrases that select
lines for a command to work with

worksheet

table

•

AS phrases that define columns as to type

•

TO phrases that send command output to the line printer, a
printer attached to the terminal, or a disk file instead of
your terminal screen

•

IN phrases that access
directory other than
system disk

•

EXTERNAL phrases that access data outside of ADE

a table or procedure in an ADE
your own or on a disk other than the

Since ADE does not prompt you for these optional phrases, as
does for the required input, you must:
•

Enter them when you enter the command

•

Use the correct format for the phrase

•

Enter them at the correct place on the command line

Although it may take a little time for you to learn and to
comfortable with optional phrases, they are very useful.

7-1

feel

OPTIONAL PHRASES
For each phrase, this chapter tells you:
•

When to use it (its purpose)

•

How to enter it (its format)

•

Where to enter it on the command line

•

How it affects each command's action

The examples for each type of optional phrase use only
optional
phrase being described, but combinations of
optional phrases are possible and useful.

the
the

Some commands mentioned in this chapter have not been introduced
before.
The command descriptions in Chapter 12 also contain
some additional information about optional phrases.

7.1

SPECIFYING LINES - THE WHERE AND EXCEPT PHRASES

Unlike most of the phrases in this chapter, the WHERE and EXCEPT
phrases are not completely new to you. In Chapters 4 and 6, you
saw how the PICK command uses these phrases.
You can use a WHERE or an EXCEPT phrase to reduce the total
number of lines used, and thus save time. The WHERE and EXCEPT
phrases are optional for commands that can work with specific
lines in the worksheet or a table, instead of the entire
worksheet or table.

The format of the phrase is:
WHERE condition
EXCEPT condition
Remember, in the PICK command, you specify a WHERE or EXCEPT
phrase by typing WHERE or EXCEPT followed by a condition. WHERE
tells the command to use all lines that meet the condition;
EXCEPT tells the command to use all lines except those that meet
the condition. A WHERE or EXCEPT phrase should follow the last
required command input.

7-2

OPTIONAL PHRASES
The format of a condition is:
Column Operator Value.
Column is the name of any column in the worksheet (or the table)
or the keyword LINE.
Operator is one of the following:
*Operator*

*Meaning*

EQ or =
NE or <>
LT or <
LE or <=
GT or >
GE or >=
BT
BW
EW

Value is a group of characters, a number, or a date.

*Examples*:
Instead of doing a GET and then a PICK command, use a WHERE
phrase on the GET command to copy into the worksheet only the
lines in the table PARTS that have the WHOUSE column value of
W1. ADE displays:
GET table PARTS WHERE WHOUSE EQ W1
Instead of doing a PICK and then a SAVE command, use a WHERE
phrase on the SAVE command to save in the table NEWPARTS only
the worksheet lines where the value in column QTY is greater
than 100. ADE displays:
SAVE worksheet as NEWPARTS WHERE QTY GT 100
Instead of listing all the lines in the PARTS table, use an
EXCEPT phrase on the LIST command to list all the lines except
those where the value in column QTY is less than or equal to
100. ADE displays:
LIST existing PARTS columns ALL EXCEPT QTY LE 100
Use a WHERE phrase to place the word DONE in column STATUS in
all lines where the value in column DUE.DATE is 30-Dec-82. ADE
displays:
MOVE from "DONE" to column STATUS WHERE DUE.DATE EQ 30-Dec-82

7-3

OPTIONAL PHRASES
WHERE and EXCEPT sections of reports also use WHERE
phrases (see Chapter 10).

7.2

and

EXCEPT

SPECIFYING COLUMN TYPE - THE AS PHRASE

You use an AS phrase with the MAKE COLUMN or RENAME column
command to define or redefine a column type. When numbers are
in numeric columns, date values are in date columns, and ordered
values are in key columns, ADE performs at its best. The AS
phrase:
•

Defines the type of data that the column can contain

•

Specifies whether or not the column is the key column

The AS phrase takes one of the following forms:
AS NUMERIC
AS DATE
AS CHARACTER
AS KEY
AS NO KEY or AS NON KEY
An AS phrase should immediately follow the column name to
it refers.

which

If numeric or date values are entered into a CHARACTER column in
the worksheet, you can easily change the type to NUMERIC or
DATE, as appropriate, with a RENAME command using an AS phrase.
AS phrases can also be used when naming the columns
WORKSHEET command.

7-4

MAKE

OPTIONAL

PHR~SES

*Examples*:
Use an AS phrase to add a new numeric column called PRICE to the
worksheet. ADE displays:
MAKE new COLUMN called PRICE AS NUMERIC
Use an AS phrase to specify that the existing column
the key column in the worksheet. ADE displays:

PRICE

RENAME existing PRICE to PRICE AS KEY

7.3

SPECIFYING OUTPUT DESTINATION - THE TO PHRASE

You use a TO phrase with a NAMES, OUTLINE, LIST, or
command to direct output to one of the following options:
•

Your system's line printer:

•

A local printer port connected to your terminal:

•

A file:

•

Any other output device:

GRAPH

TO PRINTER
TO PORT

TO FILE filename
TO DEVICE devicename

If you do not specify any of these options, output goes to
terminal.

The TO phrase takes one of the following forms:
TO PRINTER
TO PORT
TO FILE filename
TO DEVICE devicename
TO TERMINAL

7-5

your

OPTIONAL PHRASES
TO PORT sends output to a hardcopy printer, such as a DECwriter,
which may be connected to your terminal. This optional phrase
can be used with VT102 and VT125 terminals, with VT100s with
Printer Port Option, and certain VT52s. Do not use the TO PORT
option if you do not have a printer connected to your terminal.
Filename in TO FILE filename is any valid file name on the
system, such as MYFILE.LST.

host

Devicename in TO DEVICE devicename is any valid physical
logical output device name on the host system, such as LP1:
LQP:.

or
or

You must delete files you create with the TO phrase when you no
longer need them. Deleting these files is not automatic; you
must do it outside of ADE.
You can also use TO phrases when running

reports

(see

Chapter

1 0) •

If your terminal has a printer connected to it, you must set the
terminal characteristics to FORM mode before using the TO PORT
phrase. Ask your system manager to help you do this.
If you do not use a TO phrase with a NAMES, OUTLINE, LIST, or
GRAPH command, the output is directed to the terminal. The TO
TERMINAL phrase is primarily for use with an ASK command used in
verbs (see Chapter 9).

*Examples*:
Use a TO phrase to print a list of your table names on the
printer. ADE displays:

line

NAMES of TABLES TO PRINTER
Use a TO phrase to put a copy of the worksheet listing in a file
called MYFILE.LST. ADE displays:
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL TO FILE MYFILE.LST

7-6

OPTIONAL PHRASES

7.4

SPECIFYING A DISK AREA - THE IN PHRASE

You use the IN phrase to obtain Read access to tables,
directories, verbs, and reports that are stored in other users'
areas. For example:
•

You can use an IN phrase with an OUTLINE or GET command to
access a table stored in another ADE user area or on a disk
other than the system disk.

•

You can use an IN phrase with a NAMES command to
ADE directory in another ADE user area.

•

You can use an IN phrase with a LIST command to list a
table, verb, or report stored in another ADE user area or on
a disk other than the system disk.

•

You can use an IN phrase with a COPY command to copy a verb
or report in another ADE user area or on a disk other than
the system disk.

access

The IN phrase takes one of the following forms:
IN [Directory]
IN Dev ice
IN Device:[Directory]
[Directory] is another ADE user area

directory

name,

such

[11,2].

Device is any valid physical or logical device name on the
system , such as DM 1 : or MYD I SK : .

host

The IN phrase can contain a device name, a directory name, or
both.
When you specify a directory but omit a device, ADE uses
the system disk. When you specify a physical device but omit a
directory, ADE uses your directory on the physical device you
specify.
When you specify a logical device but omit
a
directory, ADE uses your directory on the physical device that
the logical device represents. If you do not have a directory
on the physical device, ADE displays an error message.

7-7

OPTIONAL PHRASES
You enter an IN phrase after the table, verb, or report name to
which it refers.
In the case of the NAMES command, enter it
right after the keyword ALL, TABLES, VERBS or REPORTS which was
entered.
In either case, make sure you enter a space between
the table, verb, or report name and the IN phrase, or the
keyword and the IN phrase.
Before specifying an ADE user area directory name, make sure you
have access to the ADE files in that directory. The host system
file protection code determines whether or not you have access
to a file. The ADE user of the area in question normally has to
use the ALLOW command in ADE to grant you access.
For more
information, see the description of the ALLOW command in Chapter
12.
For information about physical and logical device names, see the
host system user's guide.
Before you try to display or copy information from a disk other
than the system disk, make sure the disk is available and
mounted. To mount a disk, exit ADE and consult an experienced
user of your system or the system manager.

*Examples*:
Use an IN phrase to list
[11,2]. ADE displays:

the

table

names

ADE

user

area

Use an IN phrase to list a table called PARTS in ADE
[11,2]. ADE displays:

user

area

user

area

NAMES of TABLES IN [11,2]

LIST existing PARTS IN [11,2] columns ALL
Use an IN phrase to copy a table called PARTS in ADE
[11,2] into the worksheet. ADE displays:
GET table PARTS IN [11,2]

7-8

OPTIONAL PHRASES

7.5

CREATING AND USING NON-ADE FILES - THE EXTERNAL PHRASE

You use an EXTERNAL phrase with a SAVE or GET
you need to have:

command

only

•

ADE table data in Word Processing (WPS) list processing

•

WPS list processing data in ADE

•

Interchange data normally maintained by a programmer.

The EXTERNAL phrase is more complex than the other optional
phrases. It causes the GET and SAVE commands to deal with files
that are external to ADE but in a format that ADE can use.
SAVE copies the lines in the worksheet to a non-ADE external
format Record Management Services (RMS) sequential file. For
WPS, it translates the data into list processing format.
GET copies data from a non-ADE external format RMS sequential
file into the worksheet. For WPS, it translates the data from
list processing format.
The EXTERNAL phrase takes one of the following forms:
EXTERNAL WPS
EXTERNAL BASIC
EXTERNAL COBOL
EXTERNAL DATATRIEVE
The host system file protection code determines whether or not
you have proper access to a file. The user of the area in
question normally has to use host system commands to change the
protection on any external files that you want to work with in
your user area. For more information, see your host system
user's guide.
Default file types or extensions when using an
are:

EXTERNAL

EXTERNAL WPS - creates or looks for one file with .WPS
or extension.

phrase
type

EXTERNAL BASIC - creates or looks for two files, an RMS
sequential data file with .TBL type or extension and a map
statement file with .B2S extension or .BAS type, depending
on the host system.

7-9

OPTIONAL PHRASES
EXTERNAL COBOL - creates or looks for two files, an RMS
sequential data file with .TBL type or extension and a COBOL
descriptor file with .CBL extension or .COB type, depending
on the host system.
EXTERNAL DATATRIEVE - creates or looks for two files, an RMS
sequential data file with .TBL type or extension and a
DATATRIEVE descriptor file with .DTR type or extension.
Before you try to work with information in a non-ADE file, you
should understand clearly what you are doing. If not, you could
lose the data in the files. See Appendix D for more detailed
information on the format of external files that ADE can use and
their associated descriptor files.

*Examples*:
Use an EXTERNAL phrase to create a file external to ADE called
MLIST.WPS.
The file contains the worksheet data in WPS list
processing format. ADE displays:
SAVE worksheet as MLIST EXTERNAL WPS
Use an EXTERNAL phrase to translate a WPS list processing file
called DLIST.WPS into an ADE file and copy it into the
worksheet. ADE displays:
GET table DLIST EXTERNAL WPS
Use an EXTERNAL phrase to create a copy of the ADE worksheet
data in an RMS sequential data file called PARTS.TBL, and
generate an associated descriptor file called PARTS.DTR that can
be used directly in DATATRIEVE to access the PARTS.TBL data
file. ADE displays:
SAVE worksheet as PARTS EXTERNAL DATATRIEVE

7-10

CHAPTER 8
MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS

This chapter describes ADE's more powerful commands.
have some experience with ADE before using them.

8.1

You should

PERFORMING ARITHMETIC

Use the CALCULATE command to save time in entering and doing
arithmetic operations.
The CALCULATE command lets you combine
arithmetic operations in one command line and places the result
in the column you choose.
For example, suppose your
data:

worksheet

PRODUCT

23
10
86

35
15
75

31
13
70

29
14
64

contains

this

production

You want to add the production data for each product and put the
total number of items produced in a column called YTD (Year To
Date). When using the basic ADE commands, you have to add the
value in Q1 to Q2 and put that result in a column called YTD,
add Q3 to column YTD and put that result in YTD, and then add Q4
to column YTD and put that result in YTD. With the CALCULATE
command, you can do this in one step:
CALCULATE expression Q1+Q2+Q3+Q4 result in column YTD
When the CALCULATE command finishes, the
this:
PRODUCT

YTD

23
10
86

35
15
75

31
13
70

29
14
64

118
52
295

8-1

worksheet

looks

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
The CALCULATE command can also handle more complex arithmetic.
For example, suppose your worksheet contains this tool rental
billing data:
TOOL

BEGIN

END

RATE

12-Jun-82
15-Jun-82
19-Jun-82

23-Jun-82
19-Jun-82
29-Jun-82

2.00
3.20
4.25

You want to find the amounts to charge for each tool for each
period of use at the appropriate individual daily rate and put
the results in a column called RENT. When using the basic ADE
commands, you have to subtract the beginning date from the
ending date and put that result in a new column called DAYS, and
then multiply DAYS by RATE and put that result in a new column
called RENT. With the CALCULATE command you can do this in one
step:
CALCULATE expression RATE*(END-BEGIN) result in column RENT
In this example, you used parentheses to group the date columns
into
a
subexpression.
The subtraction operation in the
subexpression takes place before the multiplication.
The
subexpression result is now used as a numeric value in the
remaining expression. After the CALCULATE command finishes, the
worksheet looks like this:
TOOL

BEGIN

END

RATE

RENT

12-Jun-82
15-Jun-82
19-Jun-82

23-Jun-82
19-Jun-82
29-Jun-82

2.00
3.20
4.25

22.00
12.80
42.50

For a more complete description of the
Chapter 12.

8-2

CALCULATE

command,

see

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS

8.1.1

Rounding/Truncating Results

When you use any of the arithmetic commands (ADD, SUBTRACT,
DIVIDE, MULTIPLY, and CALCULATE), you can tell ADE to round or
truncate results so that they will be easier to read and use.
Use the optional phrases ROUND # or TRUNCATE II (where "II" is the
number of decimal places you want rounded or truncated) at the
end of the command line:
CALCULATE expression Q1+Q2 result in column YTD ROUND 2
The resulting figures are rounded
normally used for dollar amounts.

the

two

decimal

places

When you use the ROUND # phrase, ADE raises the number to the
next higher decimal, if the decimal immediately following the
number of de c i ma 1 p1 aces spec i fie d by " fl " is 5 or higher .
When
you use the TRUNCATE II phrase, ADE cuts off the decimals at the
number of decimal places specified by"#", no matter what the
next decimal is. For example:
NUMBER

2.358
3.403
10.395
5.000

8.2

NUMBER
ROUNDED TO 2

NUMBER
TRUNCATED TO 2

2.36
3.40
10.40
5.00

2.35
3.40
10.39
5.00

TABLES WITH THE SAME COLUMNS AS THE WORKSHEET

Use the MERGE and APPEND commands to add lines of
table to the lines of data in the worksheet.

data

from

The MERGE command does one of these operations:
•

Inserts lines from a table into the worksheet by an
column value

•

Appends lines from a table to the bottom of the worksheet

8-3

ordered

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
For example, suppose your worksheet contains employee data from
a table called EMPLOYEES where the data is ordered by badge
number:
BADGE

NAME

DEPT

START.DATE

102
104
106

SMITH
BAKER
EATON

SALES
SALES
SALES

11-Feb-82
26-Jan-81
14-Jul-80

A table called HIRED contains added data that is also ordered by
badge number:
BADGE

NAME

DEPT

SUPERVISOR

101
103
105

ADAMS
MOORE
JONES

MFG
MFG
MFG

MILLER
MILLER
MILLER

To merge the lines of data in order by
command:

badge

number,

use

the

MERGE worksheet with table HIRED over column BADGE duplicates
to NOWHERE
Your worksheet now looks like this:
BADGE

NAME

DEPT

101
102
103
104
105
106

ADAMS
SMITH
MOORE
BAKER
JONES
EATON

MFG
SALES
MFG
SALES
MFG
SALES

START.DATE
11-Feb-82
26-Jan-81
14-Jul-80

To use the MERGE command, the worksheet columns must match the
table columns in name and type. The table, however, does not
have to contain all of the worksheet columns. If the table does
not contain all of the columns in the worksheet, the command
operates as if there were blank columns supplied for the missing
ones in the table.
ADE ignores table columns that have
different names or types than those in the worksheet and
displays a message to that effect.
When you specify the ordered column over which the merge is to
take place, ADE inserts the lines into the worksheet by the
ordered values in this column. The worksheet must be sorted by
this column in ascending order and in most cases this column
should contain no duplicates. Since a key column meets these
requirements, it is ideal for an over column.
8-4

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
If there are duplicates in the over column of the worksheet, ADE
treats each_ set of duplicate values as a single entry and
handles any new duplicates from the table as specified in the
command.
For another example, suppose your worksheet contains the same
employee data as it did in the previous example and that the
table HIRED contains the same data as it did in the previous
example. To append the lines of data in the table to the bottom
of the worksheet, use this command:
APPEND to worksheet the table HIRED
Your worksheet now looks like this:
BADGE

NAME

DEPT

START.DATE

102
104
106
101
103
105

SMITH
BAKER
EATON
ADAMS
MOORE
JONES

SALES
SALES
SALES
MFG
MFG
MFG

11-Feb-82
26-Jan-81
14-Jul-80

To use the APPEND command, all column requirements are the same
as for the MERGE command. The APPEND command only adds lines
from a table to the bottom of the worksheet and, therefore, does
not prompt for an over column or a place to put duplicates. The
APPEND command does exactly what the MERGE over NONE command
does.
Both the MERGE and APPEND commands can optionally use a WHERE or
EXCEPT phrase. In addition, both can use a table specified with
an optional IN and/or EXTERNAL phrase.
After using a MERGE or APPEND command, use the SAVE command to
save the revised worksheet as a table if you want to keep the
data. In the examples, the worksheet is saved as the table
EMPLOYEES.
When you store data in tables that have the same column names,
you can use the MERGE or APPEND command to bring data from
several tables into the worksheet.
For example, suppose you keep a few categories of information on
many employees.
One table for all your employee information
would have few columns, but many lines.
In this situation,
design your employee tables to take advantage of the MERGE and
APPEND commands.

8-5

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
If your company has several
departments,
keep
employee
information in separate tables by department. Set up the tables
so they all have the same columns. Make employee name or badge
number the key column. To produce statistics or a report on all
employees, use several MERGE or APPEND commands to bring
together in the worksheet the information from each table.
When you work with similar information from more than one table:
•

Use GET to copy one table into the worksheet

•

Use MERGE or APPEND to bring lines from
the worksheet

For a more complete description
commands, see Chapter 12.

8.3

the

other

tables

into

MERGE

and

APPEND

TABLES WITH A COLUMN IN COMMON WITH THE WORKSHEET

Use the COMBINE command to save time entering data and to avoid
maintaining redundant information.
The COMBINE command adds
columns to the worksheet by extending worksheet lines with data
from another table.
For example, suppose you want to compute the weekly state
payroll tax deduction for each employee in an updated EMPLOYEES
table. Besides BADGE, NAME, and DEPT, you need each employee's
gross weekly pay and the appropriate state tax rate.
The employees in the EMPLOYEES table live in only two states,
but the states have different tax rates. While you need to know
the gross pay and state tax rate to compute this deduction, you
do not often need this information on each employee.
Instead of keeping the gross pay and tax rate in the EMPLOYEES
table, keep that information in other tables and use the COMBINE
command to add the gross pay and tax rate data for each employee
to the data in the worksheet from the EMPLOYEES table before
computing the weekly deduction.

8-6

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
Keep the gross pay and state code data for each employee in a
related table called PAY.
Note that this table has the one
column BADGE in common with the EMPLOYEES table. The PAY table
looks like this:
BADGE

GROSS

101
102
103
104
105
106

160
190
175
165
190
200

STATE.CODE
A
A
B
B
A
B

Keep the tax rate for each state in a related table called TAX.
Note that this table has the one column STATE.CODE in common
with the EMPLOYEES table. The TAX table looks like this:
STATE.CODE

RATE

. 03
• 05

To combine the data in these tables with the data in the
EMPLOYEES table, first use a GET command to copy the table
EMPLOYEES into the worksheet:
GET table EMPLOYEES
The worksheet looks like this:
BADGE

NAME

DEPT

START.DATE

101
102
103
104
105
106

ADAMS
SMITH
MOORE
BAKER
JONES
EATON

MFG
SALES
MFG
SALES
MFG
SALES

21-Dec-81
11-Feb-82
18-Jan-82
26-Jan-81
22-Feb-82
14-Jul-80

Now put this information together with the information in PAY:
COMBINE worksheet with table PAY over column BADGE non-matches
to NOWHERE

8-7

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
The worksheet has new columns GROSS and STATE.CODE.
every value in the STATE.CODE column is A or B:
BADGE

NAME

DEPT

START.DATE

GROSS

101
102
103
104
105
106

ADAMS
SMITH
MOORE
BAKER
JONES
EATON

MFG
SALES
MFG
SALES
MFG
SALES

21-Dec-81
11-Feb-80
18-Jan-82
26-Jan-81
22-Feb-82
14-Jul-80

160
190
175
165
190
200

Note

that

STATE.CODE
A
A
B
B
A
B

Now put this information together with the information in TAX:
COMBINE worksheet with table TAX over column STATE.CODE
non-matches to NOWHERE
The worksheet has a new column RATE.
the RATE column is .03 or .05:

Note that every

value

STATE. CODE

RATE

A
A
B
B
A
B

.03
.03
.05
.05
.03
. 05

BADGE

NAME

DEPT

START.DATE

GROSS

101
102
103
104
105
106

ADAMS
SMITH
MOORE
BAKER
JONES
EATON

MFG
SALES
MFG
SALES
MFG
SALES

21-Dec-81
11-Feb-82
18-Jan-82
26-Jan-81
22-Feb-82
14-Jul-80

160
190
175
165
190
200

As you see, each worksheet line has a value for RATE that
matches the entry in the STATE.CODE column. If the previous
worksheet has lines where state code is not A or B, they are not
included in the worksheet with the COMBINE command.
To find the state tax deductions, now use the CALCULATE command.
Besides saving time in data entry, the COMBINE command also
makes it easier to maintain data.
Using the same example,
suppose state A's tax rate changes. If you keep the state tax
rate in the EMPLOYEES table, you have to change every tax rate
entry for state A. When you keep the tax rates in a separate,
but related, table, you need to change only one entry.
When you store data in tables that have only one column in
common with another table and need to work with the combined
data, use the COMBINE command to put this data together.
For example, you keep many categories of information on each
employee, but you have a small number of employees. One table
for all employee information would have many columns, but only a
few lines.
In this type of situation, design your tables to
take advantage of the COMBINE command.
8-8

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
You could keep employee information in the following set of
tables, each of which has the same key column, employee badge
number:
•

One table for personal information such
and phone number

•

One table for job status information, such as date
job title, department, job description, and skills

•

One table for financial information, such as gross
deductions

When you need to work with this kind of
than one table:

name,

inform at ion

• Use GET to copy one table into the worksheet .
Use COMBINE to bring columns from other tables
• worksheet.
8.4

address,
hired,
pay

and

from

into

the

UPDATING TABLE DATA VALUES

Use the UPDATE command to save time in rev1s1ng information as a
group, rather than one item or one line at a time. The UPDATE
command performs a group of updates stored in the worksheet on
base data values in a table. The worksheet now contains the
updated data values. The table itself does not change in any
way due to the UPDATE command. If you want to use the results
of the UPDATE command later, you must use the SAVE command to
save the updated worksheet either as a new table or as a
replacement of the original table.
For example, suppose several employees have been transferred
from one state to another. You need to update the records with
the correct state tax rate.
Remember from the previous example, the gross pay and state code
data for each employee is kept in a related table called PAY:
BADGE

GROSS

101
102
103
104
105
106

160
190
175
165
190
200

STATE.CODE
A
A
B
B
A
B

8-9

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
The following data in the worksheet
state codes of the employees:
BADGE
101
102
104
106

reflects

the

changes

STATE.CODE
B

B
A
A

To update the data in the PAY table, enter:
UPDATE worksheet using table PAY over column BADGE duplicates
to NOWHERE
has

the

Now, save the revised worksheet as PAY with the SAVE command
order to keep the updated data.

When the UPDATE command is finished,
revised data in the STATE.CODE column:
BADGE

GROSS

101
102
103
104
105
106

160
190
175'
165
190
200

the

worksheet

STATE.CODE
B
B
B
A
A
A

Before using the UPDATE command, get the new values to be used
for the update into the worksheet columns with the same names
and types as those columns in the table to be updated.
The
worksheet may contain a subset of table columns, and updates
only those columns that are represented in the subset.
If the
worksheet contains columns that have different names or types
than those in the table, ADE ignores them and displays a message
to that effect. The over column in the table can be ordered, if
desired. The specified over column in the worksheet must be
sorted in ascending order and should not contain duplicates.
Since a key column meets these requirements, it is ideal for an
over column.
When you are faced with updating- several hundreds of lines of
data in a table on a daily basis, consider gathering and storing
your data for updates in tables with groups of common columns.

8-10

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
For example, you keep a moderate amount of information on a
moderate number of employees in one table ordered by badge
number. The data in this table changes often.
This time you
have ten changes to make to the table. You could use the CHANGE
command, but the UPDATE command may have two advantages.
Since
you cannot specify all ten changes with one WHERE or EXCEPT
phrase, you will have to use multiple CHANGE commands, perhaps
as many as ten.
Since the table is of moderate size, it is
quicker to use the UPDATE command.
When you want to use the UPDATE command for this kind of task:
•

Use MAKE to make a new worksheet with one column that is the
over column and a column (or columns) for the information.

•

Use ENTER to
worksheet.

•

Use UPDATE to update
worksheet data.

•

Use SAVE to save the updated information in the worksheet as
a replacement for the original table.

For a more complete
Chapter 12.

8.5

enter

the

data

the

description

into

table

the

columns

question

UPDATE

the

using

the

command,

see

BREAKING THE WORKSHEET INTO GROUPS OF LINES

Use the BREAK command to insert a new line into the worksheet
each time the value in the column (or columns) specified
changes. This is similar to the action of subtotalling with the
TOTAL command without the actual subtotals being produced. The
BREAK command also:
•

Adds a BREAK* column to the worksheet

•

Puts the break column name on each new
BREAK* column

8-11

break

line

the

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
For example, suppose you want to group the lines by part number
in the worksheet that contains data different from, but similar
to, the PARTS data. The worksheet looks like this:
PN

WHOUSE

QTY

P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04

W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3

128
135
142
92
167
251
48
74
10
65
143
202

Besides having fewer columns than PARTS, this data differs
the PARTS data in two other ways:
•

There are duplicate part numbers in the PN column.

•

The lines are ordered
WHOUSE.

(sorted)

Now enter:
BREAK on columns PN
The worksheet looks like this:
PN
P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02
P03
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04
P04

WHO USE
W1
W2
W3

QTY
128
135
142

W1
W2
W3

92
167
251

W1
W2
W3

48
74
10

W1
W2
W3

65
143
202

BREAK*

8-12

two

columns:

from

and

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
The BREAK command inserts a new worksheet line each
value in column PN changes. The BREAK command also:

time

the

•

Adds a BREAK* column to the worksheet

•

Puts the break column name PN on each break line in the
BREAK* column

new

The new lines produced by the BREAK command divide the worksheet
into groups of lines of data that have some common element, such
as part number, when listed.
Both the lines inserted into the worksheet by the BREAK command
and by the TOTAL command are especially useful when you start
using reports. The values placed in the BREAK* and TOTAL*
columns mark places where values change in specified columns.
Use WHERE and EXCEPT phrases to specify values in the BREAK* or
TOTAL* columns.
See Chapter 10 for more information on how to use the BREAK
command to prepare tables to be used in more complex reports,
and Chapter 12 for more general information on the BREAK
command.

8.6

ALLOWING ACCESS TO OTHER USERS

Use the ALLOW command to grant other ADE users on the system
access to your tables, verbs, and reports. You can do this
table by table, verb by verb, or report by report. SELF, GROUP,
and WORLD are the three classes of access to a table, verb, or
report.
SELF access refers to the owner of the table, verb, or report.
Tables, verbs, and reports are created with SELF access, so that
only the owner (creator) can access them.
GROUP access refers to other ADE users who have accounts in a
common group of accounts on the system. The system manager or
the person who issues accounts can tell you who, if anyone, is
in your group.
WORLD access refers to all ADE users on the system.
For example, suppose you want everyone else on your system
have access to your table called INFO. To do this, enter:

ALLOW access to INFO by WORLD
You can change access by again using the ALLOW command with a
more restrictive access class.
For example, change WORLD to
SELF.

8-13

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
If you do not want other ADE users to read or make copies
your tables, verbs, and reports, do not use this command.

For a more complete
Chapter 12.

see

8.7

description

the

ALLOW

command,

COPYING VERBS AND REPORTS

Use the COPY command to make a copy in your ADE area of a verb
or report (see Chapters 9 and 10) that is currently in your ADE
area or in another ADE user area on the system. In the latter
case, you must have access to the verb or report involved. This
may require the other ADE user to grant you access with the
ALLOW command.
You can also use the COPY command to copy the
last several ADE commands issued into a verb in your ADE area.
This verb can then be changed with the CHANGE command.
Examples:
To produce a new copy of an existing verb in your area, enter:
COPY procedure OLD.VERB to NEW.VERB
To copy an existing master report in another area that you
access to, enter:

have

COPY procedure MASTER.REPORT IN [1,2] to MY.REPORT
To copy the last ten commands you typed
area, enter:

into

verb

your

COPY procedure JOURNAL to MY.VERB
For a more complete description of the COPY command, see Chapter
12 •

8.8

SETTING OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS

Use the SET command to change one or more of several operational
parameters (terminal display settings). These changes affect
only your terminal and remain in effect until the EXIT command
ends the ADE session.
Three of the settings are especially useful to you as an ADE
user. They are the display width on VT100 terminals, the format
for displaying dates, and the format for displaying numbers.

8-14

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
ADE's SET WIDTH command sets the display width of your VT100
terminal and informs both the host system and the terminal of
the change of width. Do not use the SET-UP key on the keyboard
or any host system comman<rS:
Examples:
To change the width from 80 to 132 columns, enter:
SET option WIDTH 132
The display changes from 80 to 132 columns in width.
To change the width from 132 to 80 columns, enter:
SET option WIDTH 80
The display changes from 132 to 80 columns in width.
ADE uses a default display format for dates that uses a standard
date pattern.
This format is also used on data entered into
date columns. To change this date format, use a SET DATE
command.
You must use the date January~ 1980 to specify the
desired date format.
Example:
To change the date format from the current one to one that
involves only two digit numbers separated by slashes with the
order month, day, and year, enter:
SET option DATE 01/02/80
The date format changes as a result of this command action. Any
subsequent display of or data entry into date columns will be in
the new date format.
ADE uses a default display format for both positive and negative
numbers.
This format is also used when data is entered into
numeric columns. To change the negative number format, use a
SET NEGATIVE command. Specify the new negative number format by
including the negative number -9000 in the desired format in the
SET command line.

8-15

MORE POWERFUL COMMANDS
Example:
To change the negative number format from the current one to one
that uses a leading minus sign with commas setting off every
three digits, enter:
SET option NEGATIVE -9,000
The negative number format changes as a result of the command
action.
Any subsequent display of or data entry into numeric
columns will be in the new format.
For more information on the SET command
Chapter 12.

8.9

and

its

options,

see

UNPROMPTED COMMAND ENTRY

Once you learn the ADE commands, you do not need to wait for
each command prompt
you can just enter all command inputs
with a space between each input. You can also abbreviate inputs
where abbreviations are allowed. Use the DELETE key to correct
typing mistakes. Press the RETURN key only when the command is
complete.
To specify each default in an unprompted command entry, type
default value, its abbreviation, or simply an asterisk in
correct place in the command line being entered.
After
press the RETURN key, ADE displays the command with all
prompts and the inputs you specified.

the
the
you
its

ADE accepts a valid unprompted command entry up to the point of
a complete command or up to the point where an error in the
command is recognized. In the case of an error, ADE prompts for
the next input of those inputs remaining necessary to complete
the command. Remember that you can cancel the command by
pressing CTRL/C at any time before completing your command line
input.

8-16

CHAPTER 9
WORKING WITH VERBS

Once you start using ADE, you will find that most of your tasks
use several commands and that you must enter the commands in a
specific order. Instead of entering the same commands each
time,
you
can
make
verbs that perform these commands
automatically.
You name a verb when you make it. A verb consists of a series
of steps specifying an ordered set of operations. The verb may
contain one or more ADE commands as well as other verb and/or
report names to be used in performing the task.
This chapter discusses:
•

Making a verb

•

Making verbs that use other verbs and reports

•

Using new names as verb steps

•

Putting comments in a verb

•

Designing one verb to do different tasks

9.1

HOW TO MAKE A VERB

Before making a verb, think about what you want the verb to do.

9-1

WORKING WITH VERBS
Working with a verb consists of:
•

Designing and naming the verb

•

Making the verb with the MAKE command

•

Displaying the steps in the verb with the LIST command

•

Using the verb and troubleshooting it

•

Changing the verb with the CHANGE command

9.1.1

Designing The Verb

Define the tasks for the verb and then list the commands
for each task in the order of use.

needed

You can enter all but the following commands in a verb:

• HELP
• NAMES
• OUTLINE
• MAKE (for worksheets, verbs, and reports)
• CHANGE (for verbs and reports)
The HELP, NAMES, and OUTLINE commands produce the immediate
display of information when entered while making a verb.
This example shows how to design a verb.
information in the table INVENTORY:
PN

WHOUSE

QTY

P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04

W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3

128
135
142
92
167
251
48
74
10
65
143
202

9-2

Suppose you have

this

WORKING WITH VERBS
You want a verb to:
•

Get a copy of the INVENTORY table into the worksheet

•

In the QTY column, produce subtotals by part
column total

•

List the worksheet at the terminal

number

and

The verb needs these commands:
1.

GET table INVENTORY

TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN

LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL

Now, decide on a name for this verb.

9.1.2

Rules For Naming A Verb

Here are the rules for naming a verb.
•

A verb name:
Can contain only letters, numbers, and periods
Can be up to 16 characters long
Must start with a letter
Cannot end with a period
Cannot contain any spaces

•

Each verb you make must be given a unique name. Do not give
a verb the same name as an 4DE command or its legal
abbreviation, or an already existing verb, report, or table.
Also, do not give a verb a name that is the same as an ADE
keyword or its legal abbreviation.

•

You cannot abbreviate verb names.

9-3

WORKING WITH VERBS

9.1.3

Making A Verb With MAKE

Use the MAKE command to make a verb. You have prompts to enter
the commands, one at a time. Enter the commands the same way as
you do on the command line when entering commands interactively.
Each command becomes a step in the verb.
The following example shows you how to make a simple verb called
TASK.
Begin by entering the following command:
MAKE new VERB called TASK
ADE now prompts you to enter commands into the verb, one command
at a time. Here is how the screen looks:

* Enter steps for the Verb "TASK".
Step 1? _
* Enter a command, a Verb or Report name, or type HELP
Here is how the screen looks after you enter the first command:

* Enter steps for the Verb "TASK".
Step
GET table INVENTORY
Step 2?
* Enter a command, a Verb or Report name, or type HELP
Here is how the screen looks after you enter the second command:

* Enter steps for the Verb "TASK".
Step 1 GET table INVENTORY
Step 2 TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN
Step 3?
* Enter a command, a Verb or Report name, or type HELP

9-4

WORKING WITH VERBS
Here is how the screen looks after you enter the third command:

* Enter steps for the Verb "TASK".
Step 1 GET table INVENTORY
Step 2 TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN
Step 3 LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL
Step 4? * Enter a command, a Verb or Report name, or type HELP
You have now entered all the commands for this verb. Press the
ENTER key on the keypad to indicate that there are no more
commands.
This message is displayed:
Enter a description for the Verb:
You can enter a line of up to 32 characters that describes
verb or just press the RETURN key to enter nothing.
description is displayed with the name of the verb when
issue the NAMES of VERBS command. ADE now displays:

the
The
you

The Verb "TASK" has been saved.
At this point, you can use the NAMES command to display
names of the verbs in your ADE user area, including TASK.

the

Remember, the HELP, NAMES, and OUTLINE commands can be used to
provide needed information while making a verb. You can also
press the HELP key whenever you need help.

9.1.4

Displaying The Steps In A Verb With LIST

Use the LIST command to display the steps in a verb.
verb name instead of WORKSHEET or a table name.
For example, to list the verb TASK, enter:
LIST existing TASK

9-5

Enter

the

WORKING WITH VERBS
This information is displayed in the scrolling area:
Step
Step
Step

1
2
3

GET table INVENTORY
TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL

The TO PRINTER and TO FILE optional phrases used with the LIST
verb command produce, respectively, a printed listing or a file
of the steps in the verb.

9.1.5

Using A Verb

To use a verb, type the verb name on the command line after the
Ade: command prompt and press the RETURN key. ADE then carries
out each command in the verb in order starting with step one.
Steps are completed one at a time until they all are completed
or until a condition is found that prevents the current step
from completing.
While the verb is running, the step that is
being performed appears on the command line, unless you use the
SET command to turn off the display of the steps.
The commands work the same way they do when you enter them one
by one on the command line. Since the information on the screen
changes quickly, you may need to use the NO SCROLL key to stop
and restart the screen display to see each command result as it
occurs.
For example, type TASK on the command line and press the RETURN
key.
Here is how the command area looks during step one of the
verb:
Step 1: GET table INVENTORY
The Verb TASK is running.
Here is how the command area looks during step two of the verb:
Step 2: TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN
The Verb TASK is running.
Here is how the command area looks
verb:

during

Step 3: LIST table WORKSHEET columns ALL
The Verb TASK is running.

9-6

step

three

the

WORKING WITH VERBS
The following is displayed in the scrolling area:

WHOUSE

QTY

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02
P03
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04
P04

W1
W2
W3

128
135
142
405
92
167
251
510
48
74
10
132
65
143
202
410
1457

W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3

TOTAL*

PN
TOTAL

Finally, this message is displayed in the message area:
The Verb "TASK" has finished.

9.1.6

Troubleshooting

The following problems can occur when you run a verb:
•

An error in a step.
Suppose that, when you made the verb TASK, you typed the
table name INVENTORY incorrectly as INVENTROY. You did not
notice your mistake. When you run TASK, GET looks for a
table named INVENTROY.
When an error like this occurs in a step, the verb stops
running.
The Ade:
command prompt appears on the command
line and ADE displays a message that tells you:
The step where the error occurred
The cause of the error

9-7

WORKING WITH VERBS
In the example, the following message is displayed:
The verb "TASK" stopped at step 1.
Cannot find a Table called "INVENTROY".
Solution: Use CHANGE to correct the verb, as
Section 9.1.7.

described

no
errors
were
The verb runs without stopping and
• recognized,
but the results differ from the results you
expected.
You designed the verb incorrectly for your task.
You
entered the commands in the wrong order, or you used one or
more commands incorrectly.
Solution: List the verb and check eac~ step.
After you
find the problem, use CHANGE to correct the verb, as
described in Section 9.1.7.
•

You need to stop a verb while it is running.
Solution:

9.1.7

Press CTRL/C to cancel the verb.

Changing A Verb With CHANGE

To change a verb, you must specify the name of the verb to
change in the CHANGE command.
After you enter the command,
CHANGE displays the steps in the verb on the screen.
You make changes by entering new steps and by pressing function
keys. You can enter, delete, and change whole steps, as well as
changing a part of a step. To change a whole step, enter a new
step and erase the old step. To change part of a step, use the
RIGHT function key to position the cursor on the part of the
step to be changed and then enter the changed part to replace
the original part. The step numbers on the screen change every
time you enter or delete a step.

9-8

WORKING WITH VERBS
During a CHANGE command, three types of functions are active:
•

Functions that display information

•

Functions that move the cursor

•

Functions that change the contents of the verb

The following functions display information:
<HELP>

Displays more detailed information about what ADE
expects as input next.

Rewrites the screen so that you can see the
display clearly. Use DISPLAY after using <HELP>.

The following keys move the cursor:
<RETURN>

Moves the cursor down to the next step.

<DOWN>

Moves the cursor down to the next step.

<UP>

Moves the cursor back up to the previous step.

<TOP>

Moves the cursor to the beginning
keeping changes made so far.

Moves the cursor down to the end of the
you can add more steps.

Moves the cursor so that
you
can
insert
additional steps between two existing steps.
<INSERT> places the verb in INSERT mode, letting
you insert more than one additional line at one
time. When you are in INSERT mode, the <RETURN>
key moves the cursor to the next line for another
step insertion. Press <RETURN> twice to leave
INSERT mode.

<RIGHT>

Moves the cursor one command part to the right.

<FIND>

Prompts you to enter a character string and then
moves the cursor to the first step containing the
string.
The character string you enter
is
displayed in brackets the next time you enter
<FIND>. To move the cursor to the next step
containing this string, enter <FIND NEXT>.

Moves the cursor to the next step containing
string last entered for <FIND>.

the

verb,

verb

the

You can find the nth step containing an already
specified string by combining <FIND NEXT> with
the numbers on the main keyboard.

9-9

WORKING WITH VERBS
If, for example, you want to find the second GET
command, press the following keys, in this order:
•

The GOLD key on the keypad

•

The number 2 on the main
indicate "do two times")

•

The <FIND NEXT> function key on the keypad

keyboard

(to

If the same character string appears more than
once in a step, it still counts as one <FIND> or
<FIND NEXT>.
Like most other ADE functions,
<FIND> and <FIND NEXT> work on whole steps only.
The following keys change the contents of the verb:
<DELETE LINE>

Deletes the step that the cursor is on.

Brings back the last step deleted.

Exits CHANGE and deletes all changes you made.

<ENTER>

Exits CHANGE and enters all changes you made.

For example, in the verb TASK make these changes:
•

Insert this PICK command after the TOTAL command:
PICK columns PN,QTY and lines WHERE TOTAL* EQ PN

•

Replace the LIST command with the following LIST command:
LIST existing WORKSHEET TO PHINTER columns ALL

To change the verb, enter the following command:
CHANGE existing TASK
After you press the RETURN key, ADE displays the
the scrolling area:

verb

* Enter steps for the Verb "TASK".
Step 1? GET table INVENTORY
* Enter a command, a Verb or Report name, or type HELP
Step
Step

2
3

TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL

9-10

TASK

WORKING WITH VERBS
Follow these steps.

The display changes after each step.
the

RETURN

Move the cursor down two lines by pressing
twice.

Enter the PICK command and press the RETURN key.

Enter the new LIST command and press the RETURN key.

Press <DELETE LINE> to delete the old LIST command.

Press <ENTER> to complete the change.

key

The changed verb TASK now appears:
Step
Step
Step
Step

1
2
3
4

GET table INVENTORY
TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN
PICK columns PN,QTY and lines WHERE TOTAL* EQ PN
LIST existing WORKSHEET TO PRINTER columns ALL

9.2

MAKING VERBS THAT USE OTHER VERBS

To make a verb that
name as a step in
be an existing verb
any number of other

uses another verb, enter the second verb
the first verb. The verb name you enter can
or a verb not yet made. Any verb can have
verb names as steps.

ADE
Placing one verb name inside another is called nesting.
allows up to ten levels of nesting. When you make nested verbs,
keep the following rules in mind:
•

When a verb containing names of other verbs
verbs finish before outer verbs.

•

A verb cannot run itself.

run,

inner

You can make a verb that runs several other verbs by using one
level of nesting, several levels of nesting, or both. MAKE and
CHANGE do not check for incorrect nesting. Examples of correct
and incorrect nesting are shown in Figures 9-1, 9-2, and 9-3.

9-11

WORKING WITH VERBS
Figure 9-1 shows one level of nesting.
correctly.

The

verbs

are

nested

VERB1
VERB2
VERB3
VERB4

VERB2

VERB3

VERB4

·----------Figure 9-1:

One Level Verb Nesting

When you run VERB1 as shown in Figure 9-1, VERB2 runs first,
VERB3 runs next, and VERB4 runs last. Each verb finishes before
the next verb starts. When you use one level of nesting, you
can run the same verb several times by entering its name as
several steps in the same verb.
Figure 9-2 shows three levels of nesting.
correctly.

The verbs are

nested

VERB1
VERB2

---> VERB2
VERB3

---> VERB3
VERB4

---> VERB4
I

-----

Figure 9-2:

I
I

-----

Three Level Verb Nesting

In Figure 9-2, VERB2 is a step in VERB1, but none of the other
verbs are steps in VERB1. Instead, VERB2 contains VERB3, and
VERB3 contains VERB4. All four verbs are running at the same
time. Inner verbs finish before outer verbs. Thus:
•

VERB4 finishes first.

•

VERB3 finishes next.

•

VERB2 finishes next.

•

VERB1 finishes last.

9-12

WORKING WITH VERBS
Figure 9-3 shows incorrect nesting.
VERB1
VERB2

---> VERB2
VERB3

---> VERB3
VERB1

Figure 9-3:

Incorrect Verb Nesting

When you run VERB1:
•

VERB1 starts VERB2.

VERB2 starts VERB3.

VERB3 tries to start VERB1.

VERB1 stops running.
message area:

The following message is displayed in

the

The Verb "VERB1" calls itself at step 1.

9.3

MAKING VERBS THAT USE REPORTS

To make a verb that uses a report, enter the report name as a
step in the verb. Any number of verb steps can be report names.
You can use the same report several times in a verb by entering
its name several times.
For each step, you can enter an existing report or a report you
have not yet made. When you enter an existing report, you are
prompted for the table or worksheet to use with the report.

9-13

WORKING WITH VERBS

9.4

USING UNKNOWN NAMES AS VERB STEPS

When you enter the name of a verb or a report that does not
exist as a verb step, ADE questions its use in the verb.
example, if the name entered is NAME, ADE displays:

yet
For

Will "NAME" be a Verb or Report?
If you answer R for report, you are prompted for a table name or
the worksheet to use with the report.
If you answer V for verb, you
else.

are

not

prompted

for

anything

If you made an error and do not want this step to be a verb or
report, answer NO and press the RETURN key or just press the
RETURN key.

9.5

PUTTING COMMENTS IN A VERB

A comment is one or more lines of text that describes a step or
a group of steps in a verb. Comments make verbs easier for you
to understand, especially verbs with many steps or verbs that
run other verbs and reports. When changing a verb, comments can
help you to remember what the verb is designed to do.
You enter comments with MAKE or CHANGE the same way you enter
other steps. To enter a comment line, type REMARK and press the
RETURN key. The prompt <message> appears on the command line.
After <message>, type the comment and press the RETURN key. You
must start every comment line with REMARK.
Comments are displayed when you list, change, and run a verb.
For example, suppose you want
beginning of the verb TASK:

enter

this

TASK,

enter

comment

the

This verb lists QTY for each PN.
To add this comment
command:

the

verb

the

following

CHANGE existing TASK
CHANGE displays the verb TASK in the scrolling area. Enter the
comment and then press the ENTER key on the keypad to finish.
Only the step you are entering is shown here.
Step 1 REMARK <message> This verb lists QTY for each PN.
* Enter message text

9-14

WORKING WITH VERBS
Now list the verb TASK to see how
entering the following command:

comments

are

displayed

LIST existing TASK
The verb TASK is displayed:
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step

1
2
3
4
5

REMARK This verb lists QTY for each PN.
GET table INVENTORY
TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN
PICK columns PN,QTY and lines WHERE TOTAL* EQ PN
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL

9.6

DESIGNING ONE VERB TO DO DIFFERENT TASKS

ADE has one command, ASK, to use mainly in verbs. By using ASK
as a step in a verb and then using the associated response area
name in commands in other steps, you can make a verb that
performs different tasks based on input from the person running
the verb.
ASK gets input by displaying a message and accepting input when
a verb is running. The message, defined by the person who makes
the verb, can ask for a command line or one or more command
inputs such as a table name, a WHERE or EXCEPT phrase, a column
list or a device specification. ASK stores the input in the
specified response area. They are named RESPONSE1, RESPONSE2,
RESPONSE3, RESPONSE4, and RESPONSE5. Depending on the input you
enter, the verb can work differently each time it runs.
When you make or change the verb, enter the ASK command
step. Enter ASK using RESPONSE1 to solicit a table name:

ASK for response number 1 using message WHAT TABLE?
When entering the ASK command in the verb, you must enter the
response area number to be used and the message or question for
ASK to display when the verb is run. (ASK does not supply the
question mark.)
In another step in the verb, make use of the input provided.
Instead of entering a specific command input (such as a table
name), specify the appropriate response area name where you want
the input used as the command input.

9-15

WORKING WITH VERBS
When the verb is run, ASK displays the message and accepts
input.
The person running the verb responds to the message.
ADE puts the input into the specified response area.
When the
verb reaches the step where that response area is referenced,
the verb uses the value in that response area as the command
input for that step.
For example, suppose you want to change the verb TASK to work on
any table with the columns PN and QTY, not just the INVENTORY
table. Using the CHANGE command, change the verb TASK to have
the following steps:
Step
Step
Step
Step
Step

1
2
3
4
5

ASK for response number 1 using message WHAT TABLE?
GET table RESPONSE1
TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN
PICK columns PN,QTY and lines WHERE TOTAL* EQ PN
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL

Now run the verb to see how ASK works.
by typing the table name INVENTORY.

Respond to

the

message

This is what is displayed in the command area:
Step 1 ASK for response number 1 using message WHAT TABLE?
The Verb "TASK" is running.
This is what is displayed in the message area:
WHAT TABLE?

INVENTORY

This is what is then displayed in the command area:
Step 2 GET table INVENTORY
The Verb "TASK" is running.
Because you typed INVENTORY, TASK works the same way it did
before you added the ASK command and RESPONSE1 in the GET
command. The GET command uses whatever table you specify in
your input to ASK. For more information on ASK, see Chapter 12.

9-16

CHAPTER 10
WORKING WITH REPORTS

Sometimes you need to present information that is organized,
easy to read, and easy to understand. While a table is a good
way to store and work with information, a table by itself
sometimes can be hard to read and understand. This is why you
may need a report.
ADE has a tool for making a report from a table or the
worksheet.
This tool, called a report procedure, is a set of
instructions that specifies how to present data already in a
table or the worksheet.
When you run a report procedure, it
produces a report listing. A report listing looks much like a
typewritten report.
Here are some possible ways to use a report procedure:
•

Change the format of data so it is easier to read

•

Add text to explain data

•

Highlight important data (such as subtotals and totals)

•

Summarize data by printing only subtotals and totals

In ADE you need not make a report procedure from scratch;
instead, ADE provides a standard (or default) report procedure.
Use the MAKE command to create a standard report procedure on
your data.
If the standard report procedure does not produce
the report you need, use the CHANGE command to change it.

10-1

WORKING WITH REPORTS
When you have the report procedure you want, you can use
more than one table or the worksheet.

The rest of this chapter describes how to work
procedures. It is divided into two main sections:

report

•

Making a standard report from a table

•

Changing a report procedure with CHANGE

10.1

MAKING A STANDARD REPORT FROM A TABLE

with

To produce a standard report:
1.

Prepare your data with the ADE commands.

Use the MAKE command to make a standard report on your data.

Use the standard report
listing.

10.1.1

procedure

produce

the

report

Preparing The Data For A Report

You can make a report procedure using the data in the worksheet
or a table to specify the basic contents and format of the
report. Since the data in the worksheet or table determines to
some extent what the standard report looks like, you should
review the data and make sure it is in the form you want.
You may want to:
•

Use SORT to sort the data

•

Use TOTAL to produce totals and subtotals

The following example shows how to prepare some data to be
in making a report.

10-2

used

WORKING WITH REPORTS
As an example, suppose you have the following inventory data
the worksheet:
WHOUSE

QTY

W1
W1
W1
W1
W2
W2
W2
W2
W3
W3
W3
W3

P01
P02
P03
P04
P01
P02
P03
P04
P01
P02
P03
P04

128
92
48
65
135
167
74
143
142
251
10
202

This data is ordered by warehouse (WHOUSE column), but you want
the report to order the data by part number. To prepare the
data for the report, sort the data by part number:
SORT by columns PN,WHOUSE
After the SORT command finishes, the worksheet looks like this:
WHOUSE

QTY

W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3

P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04

128
135
142
92
167
251
48
74
10
65
143
202

The data is now ordered by part number, but the columns are not
in the order you want in the report. However, you do not have
to change the physical order of the columns in the worksheet
because you can reorder the columns in the report listing.

10-3

WORKING WITH REPORTS
You also want your report to include the total quantity of all
parts, as well as the quantity of each part. Use the following
TOTAL command to produce the desired total and subtotals:
TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN
After the TOTAL command finishes, the worksheet looks like this:
WHOUSE

QTY

W1
W2
W3

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02
P03
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04
P04

128
135
142
405
92
167
251
510
48
74
10
132
65
143
202
410
1457

W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3

TOTAL*

PN
TOTAL

Now you need to decide on a name for this report.

10.1.2

Rules For Naming A Report

The following are the rules for naming a report:
1.

A report name:
•

Can contain only letters, numbers, and periods

•

Can be up to 16 characters long

•

Must start with a letter

•

Cannot end with a period

•

Cannot contain any spaces

10-4

WORKING WITH REPORTS
2.

Each report must have a unique name. Do not give a report
the same name as an ADE command or its legal abbreviation,
or an already existing report, verb, or table. Also, do not
give it a name that is the same as an ADE keyword or its
legal abbreviation.

You cannot abbreviate report names.

10.1.3

Making A Standard Report With MAKE

After you prepare your data, use the MAKE command
standard report.

make

the

The following example makes a standard report called QUANTITIES
using the data in the worksheet described in Section 10.1.1.
Begin by entering the following command:
MAKE new REPORT called QUANTITIES using table WORKSHEET
ADE now makes a standard report procedure using the data in the
worksheet as a model. It uses default values wherever it needs
them to produce the sections of the report procedure.
These
sections are described later in this chapter.
After it makes the standard report procedure, ADE performs an
implicit CHANGE command.
You are prompted for changes to the
COLUMNS section. Since you are now concerned only with the
standard report procedure without changes, press the ENTER key
on the keypad to indicate that no changes are to be made.
The following is displayed in the message area:
Enter a desc~iption for the Report:
You can enter a line (up to 32 characters) that describes
report or just press the RETURN key to enter nothing.
description is displayed with the name of the report when
issue the NAMES of REPORTS command.

the
The
you

When this is done, ADE displays:
The Report "QUANTITIES" has been saved.
At this point you can use the NAMES command to display the names
of the reports in your ADE user area, including QUANTITIES.

10-5

WORKING WITH REPORTS
10.1.4

Displaying Standard Report Sections With LIST

Use the LIST command to display the sections of a report
procedure.
Enter the report name instead of WORKSHEET or a
table or verb name.
For example, to list the report QUANTITIES, enter:
LIST existing QUANTITIES
The sections of the standard report
displayed in the scrolling area.
You can use the TO PRINTER or TO
produce a printer listing or a
report procedure.

10.1.5

procedure

QUANTITIES

FILE optional phrases to
file of the sections in the

Using A Standard Report

To use a standard report
matter, you must:

procedure,

any

report

for

that

Type the report procedure name on the command line after the
Ade:
command prompt

Press the RETURN key

Type WORKSHEET or the name of the table to be used by the
report procedure that reflects where the data is located

Press the RETURN key

Remember that the data location name can be different from what
you provided in the MAKE command that made the standard report
procedure. The structure of the tables and the worksheet used
with a given report should be similar, if not identical.
Without further input, the report listing will be produced on
the terminal.
You can add the TO PRINTER or TO FILE optional
phrases to the command input to produce a printout of the report
listing or a file with the same information in it. When you
produce a report listing on the terminal, you can use the
NO SCROLL key to stop and restart the screen display.

10-6

WORKING WITH REPORTS
For example, to use the standard report that was made and listed
in the previous examples, enter:
QUANTITIES reporting the table WORKSHEET
The report listing is displayed in the scrolling area:

30-Dec-81 10:00 AM
INVENTORY

Page 1

---------------------------------QTY
TOTAL*
WHOUSE
PN
---------------------------------I

-----W1
W2
W3

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02

-~----

P02
W1
W2
W3

-----W1
W2
W3

------

W1
W2
W3

P03
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04
P04

128
135
142

-----405

91
167
251

-----510

48
74
10

------

132

65
143
202

-----410
-----1 '457

10-7

-----PN

-----PN
------

TOTAL

WORKING WITH REPORTS
A standard report listing differs from a listing of the
worksheet or a table to the printer or to a file using the LIST
command in the following ways:
•

The pages are numbered.

•

The table or worksheet name is centered over the data.

•

Column titles are printed on each report
have boxing around them.

•

The data is centered under the column titles.
With LIST,
data is not centered in a column. Instead, it is lined up
at the left-hand or the right-hand side of the column,
depending on column type.

•

Numbers of one thousand or more contain commas.

•

If the table or the worksheet reported on has a TOTAL*
column, new spacing and bars on each column at each total
and subtotal line are included.

10.2

listing

page

and

CHANGING A REPORT WITH CHANGE

When the standard report procedure does not produce the report
you want, you can change the standard report procedure with the
CHANGE command. Then you can run the changed report procedure
to produce a new report listing.
Once you decide to change the standard report procedure, you
need to know more about working with report procedures. In this
section you learn about:
•

Defining
report
procedure
sections,
which
contain
instructions for producing different parts of a report

•

Designing a report based on these report procedure sections

•

Changing a report procedure, using the CHANGE command
further define and change report procedure sections

10-8

WORKING WITH REPORTS
You also learn about:
•

Listing report procedure sections with LIST

•

Using a changed report procedure to see a new report listing

•

Using a report procedure on other tables

•

Using FILE* to produce more complex reports

10.2.1

Report Sections

A report procedure consists of the following major subdivisions
or sections:
COLUMNS, LAYOUT, TOP, BOTTOM, and usually one or
more WHERE or EXCEPT sections.
When you change a report
procedure, you make changes to one or more of its sections.
The COLUMNS section controls:
•

Which columns from the table to include automatically in the
report

•

The column order in the report

•

The title and its format for each column

The LAYOUT section
appearance, such as:

controls

the

report's

page

•

The number of spaces between columns of data

•

The number of lines per page and the page width

•

The format of numbers and dates

The TOP section controls what to produce
report page (page header).

The BOTTOM section controls what to produce
each report page (page foot).

the
at

layout

top
the

and

each

bottom

WHERE and EXCEPT sections control the output and format of the
lines of data being reported on. You specify a condition in
WHERE and EXCEPT sections and also what data and in what format
it is to appear if the condition is met. If a line of data
satisfies the condition, the default output of data does not
occur; the WHERE or EXCEPT section controls the output for that
line.

10-9

WORKING WITH REPORTS
The standard report procedure has COLUMNS, LAYOUT, TOP, BOTTOM,
and one WHERE section. The BOTTOM section is empty. The WHERE
section controls the output only for lines with a nonempty TOTAL
column.
You can use the CHANGE command to produce a nonempty
BOTTOM section or new WHERE or EXCEPT sections or change any
existing sections.

10.2.1.1

COLUMNS And LAYOUT Sections -

Both COLUMNS and LAYOUT sections look like charts. You can keep
the default entries in the sections or use CHANGE to change the
entries.
The COLUMNS section in the standard report procedure is based on
the table or the worksheet that you specify when you make the
new report procedure. It has the same column names and column
order as the table or worksheet specified, and the column titles
are the same as the column names.
For example, the following is the COLUMNS section
standard report procedure produced in Section 10.1.3:
@COLUMNS
WHOUSE
PN
QTY
TOTAL*

from

the

The LAYOUT sections in all standard report procedures are
identical.
Thus, the following is the LAYOUT section from the
standard report procedure produced in Section 10.1.3:
@LAYOUT
Title Boxing
Data Boxing
Vertical
boxing char
Horizontal boxing char
Spaces between Columns
Lines after title
Lines spacing
Lines per page
Page width
Left margin
Date pattern
Number pattern

For a description of each LAYOUT item and a list of all possible
values for each item, see Section 10.2.3.3.

10-10

WORKING WITH REPORTS
10.2.1.2

TOP And BOTTOM Sections -

TOP and BOTTOM sections consist of one or more line formats.
A
line
format controls how lines in a report listing are
formatted.
The TOP sections in all standard report
procedures
are
identical.
Thus, the following is the TOP section from the
standard report procedure produced in Section 10.1.3:
@TOP
TODAY* ' ' TIME* JUSTIFY* ' Page
CENTER* TABLE*
BLANK*

' PAGE*

The standard report TOP section uses the report keywords TODAY*,
TIME*, JUSTIFY*, PAGE*, CENTER*, TABLE*, and BLANK* in three
line formats. It also uses two quoted text strings. These are
all described in this section.
The BOTTOM sections in all standard report procedures are empty:
@BOTTOM
Except for the TOP section of the standard report procedure,
there are no set line for~ats. You specify how you want report
listing lines to appear. You define line formats from left to
right. When you run the report procedure, the instructions that
make up the line format are carried out from left to right.
To define a line format, you enter combinations of the following
types of instructions:
•

Keywords

•

Text

•

Response Area Names

•

Column Names (BOTTOM section only)

Be sure to enter a space between instructions in a line format.
Keywords
Report keywords are instructions that ADE carries out when you
run a report procedure. Each keyword causes a specific result
in the report listing.
The following is a list of all keywords you can use in TOP and
BOTTOM sections and their actions.
The keywords are listed
according to how you use them in a line format. You can enter
keywords in upper or lower case, but you must type the *
10-11

WORKING WITH REPORTS
The following keywords must be the only instruction
format:

line

BLANK*

Inserts one blank line in the report listing.

BLANK*(n)

Inserts ~blank lines in the report listing.

HEADINGS*

Causes column headings to be output, if they
have not already been output on the report page.

You can use one or more of the
format:

following

keywords

line

format

CENTER*

Centers the rest
report line.

the

JUSTIFY*

Right-justifies the rest of the line format
turns off centering.

and

SQUISH*

Turns
off
centering
right-justification.

turning

REPORT*

Inserts the name of the report
used.

TABLE*

Inserts the name of the table or worksheet being
reported on.

DESCRIPTION*

the
table
or
Inserts the description of
worksheet being reported on. For the worksheet,
it is blank.

ROUTING*

Inserts the name of the file or output
being used for the report listing.

DATE*

Inserts the date the table or the worksheet was
last saved in the report listing. This is the
date shown by the NAMES of TABLES command.
For
the worksheet, it is equivalent to TODAY*.
Inserts the date the report procedure was run in
the report listing. The date format will be as
specified in the LAYOUT section.

TODAY*

the

line

without

procedure

being

device

TIME*

Inserts the time the report procedure was run in
the report listing.

PAGE*

Inserts the current report page
report listing.

10-12

number

the

WORKING WITH REPORTS
LINE*

Inserts the current line number of the table
worksheet being used in the report listing.

SPACE*

Inserts a blank space on the report line.

SPACE*(n)

Inserts n blank spaces on the report line.

FILE*(filespec) Inserts the contents of the specified file in
the report listing. The file you specify should
fit on the current report page.
Text
To specify text in a line format (such as 'Grand Total'), enter
the text you want inserted. Enter a matched quotation mark('
or ") before and after the text.
You can also use quotation marks to insert blank spaces or
quotation marks. Enter ' ' or " " to insert a blank space. To
insert quotation marks, enclose a single quotation mark with
double quotation marks ("'") or enclose a double quotation mark
with single quotation marks ( '"').
Response Area Names
Response area names can be used in both TOP and BOTTOM sections
to insert the contents of the response area used in the report
listing. See Chapter 9 and the ASK command in Chapter 12 for
more information on the use of response areas.
Column Names
Column names can be used in BOTTOM sections, but not in TOP
sections. A column name in a BOTTOM section line format inserts
at the bottom of each report page the column value from the last
line of data on that page.
For example, change the standard report BOTTOM section
PARTS table to:

for

the

@BOTTOM
TODAY* ' ' TIME* JUSTIFY* 'Page ' PAGE*
CENTER* WHOUSE
If you had run the report procedure that includes the changed
BOTTOM section above on December 30, 1981 at 3:05 PM, these two
line formats would have generated the following two lines at the
bottom of each page of the report listing:
Page 1

30-Dec-81 3:05 PM
W1
10-13

WORKING WITH REPORTS
10.2.1.3

WHERE And EXCEPT Sections -

WHERE and EXCEPT sections control the way the lines of data are
output and have many possible uses in reports. For example, you
can use WHERE and EXCEPT sections to label certain data or to
use the new data that BREAK and TOTAL add to the worksheet to
format the body of a report.
A WHERE or EXCEPT section has two parts:
•

The word WHERE or EXCEPT followed by a condition

•

One or more line formats

When you run the report procedure, the instructions in the line
formats are carried out only for the lines in the table or
worksheet that meet the specified condition.
The lines that meet the condition specified in a WHERE or EXCEPT
section differ from the rest of the lines in the table or
worksheet in that the data on these lines is not automatically
inserted in the report listing. Instead, the line formats in
the WHERE or EXCEPT section control what, if anything, to insert
in the report listing for these lines.
For example, suppose this WHERE section was added to the
QUANTITIES standard report procedure made in Section 10.1.2:
@WHERE QTY LT 20 PRINT* ALL* '*** LOW'
Now, if you run the QUANTITIES report procedure, using the
worksheet that contains the data shown in Section 10 . 1 • 1 ' one
line and only one line satisfies the WHERE condition and
generates this line in the report:
W3

P03

10 *** LOW

The column values for the line are generated by PRINT* ALL* and
the text string '*** LOW' calls attention to the part numbers
that are running low.
You can insert the data values from the columns anywhere on a
report line by specifying the column names in a line format. If
you want the data on these lines inserted under the correct
column headings in the report, you must specify the keyword
PRINT* in a line format in the WHERE or EXCEPT section.

10-14

WORKING WITH REPORTS
A given report procedure can have several WHERE and EXCEPT
sections.
Thus, it . is possible for lines in a table or the
worksheet to meet more than one condition.
In the report
listing, lines are inserted as specified for every WHERE and
EXCEPT section where the lines meet the condition.
As in BOTTOM sections, line formats in WHERE and EXCEPT sections
can consist of four types of instructions:
•

Keywords

•

Text

•

Response Area Names

•

Column Names

Be sure to enter a
format.

space

after

each

instruction

line

Keywords
In a WHERE or EXCEPT section, you can use all the keywords used
in TOP and BOTTOM sections (see Section 10.2.1.2). You can also
use the following keywords, which can be entered in either upper
or lower case.
The following keywords must be the only instruction
format:

line

NEW PAGE*

Causes a new report page to be started. You can
use NEWPAGE* in combination with FILE* to insert
the contents of several files in a report
listing.

NEWPAGE*(n)

Causes a new report page to be started if fewer
than n lines are left on the current report
listing page. If, for example, you need five
lines to completely insert the lines specified
in a
WHERE
or
EXCEPT
section,
include
NEWPAGE*(5) as the first line format of the
given WHERE or EXCEPT section.

10-15

WORKING WITH REPORTS
Use the following keywords only once in a given line format, but
other keywords may also be in the same line format with them:
PRINT* columns

Inserts the values in the specified columns
under the correct column headings in the report
listing. To insert all column values under the
correct
headings, specify PRINT* ALL*.
To
insert all column values except one or a few,
specify PRINT* OMIT* columns.

BAR* columns

Inserts dashes, instead of values, for the
specified columns in the report listing. To
insert dashes for all columns, specify BAR*
ALL*.
To insert dashes for all columns except
one or a few, specify BAR* OMIT* columns.

Text
You specify text in a WHERE or EXCEPT section the same way as in
the TOP and BOTTOM sections. Enter the text you want inserted
into the line format and enter quotation marks before and after
the text.
Response Area Names
You can use response area names in both WHERE and EXCEPT
sections to insert the contents of the response area used in the
report listing. See Chapter 9 and the ASK command in Chapter 12
for more information on the use of response areas.
Column Names
Column names can be used in WHERE and EXCEPT sections, except
for WHERE BEGIN* sections, which are described in Section
10.2.3.9. A column name in a WHERE or EXCEPT section line
format inserts the column value in the report listing for each
line in the table or worksheet that meets the WHERE or EXCEPT
condition.
Column names used after the BAR* keyword insert
underscores, not the column value, in the report listing.
For example, the following is the WHERE section that is included
in all standard reports:
@WHERE TOTAL* <> 0
BAR* ALL*
PRINT* ALL*
BLANK*

10-16

WORKING WITH REPORTS
This WHERE section condition is satisfied only by lines that
have nonempty entries in the TOTAL* column. For each line that
meets the condition, the report includes dashes in each column,
the value for each column, and a blank line. For example, the
lines inserted for the first nonempty TOTAL* column line in the
report listing in Section 10.1.4 are:
P01

10.2.2

405

Designing A Report

Before using CHANGE to add, delete, or change report procedure
sections, you should design the report listing you want to
produce. Think about the questions that follow when you design
a report. They are listed by report procedure section:
1.

TOP Section.
What information do you want to appear at the
report page?

top

each

Do you want any information to appear at the bottom of
report page? If so, what information?

each

BOTTOM Section.

COLUMNS Section.
Which table or worksheet columns do you want to
the report listing and in what order?

include

Do you want to change column names for the report listing?
Do you want multiple-line column
listing?
4.

headings

for

the

report

the

report

LAYOUT Section.
Do you want
listing?

boxing

around

column

titles

Do you want boxing around the data in the report listing?
How do you want numbers and dates to appear
listing?

10-17

the

report

WORKING WITH REPORTS

WHERE and EXCEPT Sections.
Will there be subtotal and/or total lines in the
worksheet used to produce the report listing?

table

If so, how do you want the total
appear in the report listing?

lines

and

subtotal

Do you want to group lines in the table or worksheet used to
produce the report listing?
If so, is there a column that has values in it that can be
used to determine the groups to appear in the report
listing?
Do you want to highlight or label any data?
If so, do the lines of the data have a column
described in a condition? If so, what condition?

10.2.3

that

How To Change A Report

The CHANGE command works on one report procedure section at a
time.
However, you do not need to enter a separate CHANGE
command to change each section.
After you enter the CHANGE
command, ADE displays the report procedure sections. The cursor
is first positioned at the beginning/of the COLUMNS section. At
this point, you can make changes to the column titles by
entering new ones or insert or delete new columns by pres~ing
function keys. Or you can press a function key or keys and move
on to another report procedure section that needs changing. Use
<SKIP> to do this, for example.
When you add to or change sections that have line formats, you
can enter and change whole lines, as well as using <RIGHT> to
change parts of lines. For help on line formats, you can press
the HELP key.

10.2.3.1

Function Keys -

During a CHANGE command, three types of functions are active:
•

Functions that display information

•

Functions that move the cursor

•

Functions that change the contents of a section

10-18

WORKING WITH REPORTS
The following function keys display information:
<HELP>

Displays more detailed information
ADE expects as input next.

about

what

Rewrites the screen so that you can see the
display clearly. Use the DISPLAY function after
using <HELP>.
The following keys move the cursor:
<RETURN>

Moves the cursor down to the next line.

<DOWN>

Moves the cursor down to the next line.

<UP>

Moves the cursor back up to the previous line.

<SKIP>

Moves the cursor down to the
next section.

<TOP>

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the report
procedure, which is the COLUMNS section, keeping
changes made so far.

Moves the cursor down to the end of the report
procedure, which is after the last WHERE or
EXCEPT section. This is where you can add a new
WHERE or EXCEPT section or more line formats to
the last WHERE or EXCEPT section.

Moves the cursor so that you
between two existing lines.

can

<RIGHT>

Moves the cursor right to just
line part (after space) so
changed.

after the next
that part can be

<FIND>

Prompts you to enter a character string and then
moves the cursor to the first line containing
the string. The character string you enter is
displayed in brackets the next time you enter
<FIND>. To move the cursor to the next line
containing this string, enter <FIND NEXT>.

Moves the cursor to the next line containing the
string last entered for <FIND>.

10-19

beginning

put

the

line

WORKING WITH REPORTS
You can find the line containing the nth line containing a
specified string by combining <FIND NEXT> with the numbers on
the main keyboard. If, for example, you want to find the fifth
line format containing the keyword BLANK* previously entered
with <FIND>, press the following keys, in this order:
1.

The GOLD key on the keypad

The number 5 on the main
times")

The <FIND NEXT> function key on the keypad

keyboard

(to

indicate

"do

five

If the same character string appears more than once in a line
format, it still counts as one <FIND> or <FIND NEXT>. Like most
other ADE functions, <FIND> and <FIND NEXT> work on whole lines.
The following keys change the contents of the
changing:

section

you

are

Deletes the current line. When you are changing
a COLUMNS or LAYOUT section, the cursor is on
the current line. When you are changing a TOP,
BOTTOM,
or
WHERE and EXCEPT section, the
question mark and prompt, as well as the cursor,
are also on the current line.

Brings back the last line deleted.

Exits CHANGE and deletes all changes you made.

<ENTER>

Exits CHANGE and enters all changes you made.

The examples in the following sections show how to change a
standard report procedure in a number of ways. To change any or
all report procedure sections, you must enter a CHANGE command.
To see the new report listing after you change one or more
sections, you can exit the CHANGE command and run the report
procedure.
For example, to change any
standard report procedure
the following command:

or all of the sections of the
made earlier in this chapter, enter

CHANGE existing QUANTITIES

10-20

WORKING WITH REPORTS
10.2.3.2

Changing The COLUMNS Section -

After you move the cursor in the standard report procedure to
the COLUMNS section, you are now ready to change the COLUMNS
section of the report procedure.
The column names and the titles to be used
headings are displayed in the scrolling area.
The cursor marks your place in the section.
the line on which the cursor appears.

for

the

column

The current line is

At this point, you can change column titles, add new column
names and titles, delete current column names and titles, as
well as change column order. If the change is to occur on other
than the current line in the COLUMNS section, move to that line
by pressing a function key (such as the RETURN key or the DOWN
key).
Changing Column Titles
To change a column title, put the cursor on the line of the
column to be changed and enter the new title. When you finish
typing the new title, press the RETURN key.
Enter column titles exactly as you want them to appear in the
report listing.
To enter a column title that will appear on
more than one line in the report listing, put a dash (-) between
the parts of the column title you want to appear on separate
lines. Each part of the column title will be centered.
For
example, type Part-Number to print Part and Number on two lines.
Adding New Columns
To add a column to the report that exists in the table or
worksheet that the report uses, position the cursor on the line
of the column before which you want -the new column and press
<INSERT>.
A blank line is inserted in the COLUMNS section.
Enter the new column name and press the RETURN key. Then enter
the new title (what appears in the report). When you finish
typing the new title, press the RETURN key.
Enter new column names that follow the rules for naming columns
described in Section 4.1. Enter column titles as described in
previous paragraphs in this section.

10-21

WORKING WITH REPORTS
Deleting Columns
To delete a column, position the cursor on the line of
column that you want to delete and press <DELETE LINE>.
information on the line is deleted.

the
The

The empty line left from the deletion can be used to add new
column information, as above. This is the easiest way to change
the name of a column in the COLUMNS section. If for any reason
after pressing <DELETE LINE> you want to restore the information
deleted, simply press <UNDELETE> and the
last
line
of
information deleted is restored.
Changing Column Order
To change column order, position the cursor on the line of a
column out of the desired order and press <DELETE LINE>.
Position the cursor on the line of the column before which you
want to insert the column just deleted and press <UNDELETE>.
The last deleted line is inserted in the desired place.
Repeat
this for as many columns as necessary.
Suppose you want the column headings on
look like this:
Part
Number

@COLUMNS
WHOUSE
PN
QTY
TOTAL*

report

pages

standard

report

produced

Quantity

Warehouse

The default COLUMNS section
earlier is:

your

the

Thus, you need to change the default COLUMNS section to have the
following column names and titles and appear in the following
order:
@COLUMNS
PN
WHOUSE
QTY

<Part-Number>
<Warehouse>
<Quantity>

Compare the default COLUMNS section
section line by line.

10-22

with

the

desired

COLUMNS

WORKING WITH REPORTS
You want to:
1.

Keep the first column line but change its title to Warehouse

Keep the second
Part-Number

Keep the third column line but change its title to Quantity

Delete the fourth column line

Interchange the first and second column lines

Follow these steps.
1.

column

line

but

change

its

title

The screen changes after each step.

Keep WHOUSE as the first column name, but change the
title to Warehouse.

column

With the cursor next to <WHOUSE>, type Warehouse
the RETURN key.

press

and

The following is displayed in the scrolling area:
@COLUMNS
WHOUSE
PN
QTY
TOTAL*
2.

Keep PN as the second column name, but change the column
title to Part Number, with Part and Number on separate
lines.
With the cursor next to <PN>, type Part-Number and press the
RETURN key.
The following is displayed in the scrolling area:
@COLUMNS
WHOUSE
PN
QTY
TOTAL*

10-23

WORKING WITH REPORTS

Keep QTY as the third column name,
title to Quantity.

but

change

With the cursor next to <QTY>, type Quantity and
RETURN key.

the

column

press

the

The following will be displayed in the scrolling area:
@COLUMNS
WHOUSE
PN
QTY
TOTAL*
4.

Delete the TOTAL* column line.
With the cursor next to <TOTAL*>, press <DELETE LINE>.
The following will be displayed in the scrolling area:
@COLUMNS
WHOUSE
PN
QTY

Interchange the WHOUSE and PN column lines.
Press <TOP>. With the cursor next to <Warehouse>, press
<DELETE LINE> and then press the RETURN key twice. With the
cursor next to <Quantity>, press <UNDELETE>.
The following will be displayed in the scrolling area:
@COLUMNS
PN
WHOUSE
QTY

<Part-Number>
<Warehouse>
<Quantity>

You are finished making changes to the COLUMNS section.
Press the ENTER key on the keypad to exit or position the
cursor to another section of the report procedure to make
other changes.

10-24

WORKING WITH REPORTS
10.2.3.3

Changing The LAYOUT Section -

To change the LAYOUT section, move the cursor
section in the standard report procedure.

the

The entries in the default LAYOUT section are displayed
scrolling area.
The cursor marks your place in the section.
the line on which the cursor appears.

LAYOUT
in

the

The current line is

At this point, you can make changes to the entries in the LAYOUT
section in a way similar to making changes in the COLUMNS
section.
To change an entry in the LAYOUT section:
1.

Move the cursor to the line of the entry to be changed.

Type the new entry.

Press the RETURN key to enter the new entry.

The following is the default LAYOUT section:
@LAYOUT
Title Boxing
Data Boxing
Vertical
boxing char
Horizontal boxing char
Spaces between Columns
Lines after title
Lines spacing
Lines per page
Page width
Left margin
Date pattern
Number pattern

<l>
<->

<2>
<1>
<O>
<50>
<data>
<O>
< 2-Jan-80>
<-9,000>

The following list describes what each LAYOUT section entry
controls in a report listing and lists the legal inputs for each
LAYOUT entry. For all LAYOUT section entries, the number n must
be a whole number greater than or equal to zero.
The LAYOUT section entries include:
1.

Title Boxing - Yes, No
Controls the boxing of titles (column headings). Yes causes
boxes around titles. No causes no boxes around titles.

10-25

WORKING WITH REPORTS
2.

Data Boxing - Yes, No,

Controls the boxing of data (values).
Yes causes boxes
around the columns of data. No causes no boxes around the
columns of data. The number n causes boxes around the
columns of data, as well as-additional horizontal boxing
lines after every~ lines of data.

Vertical boxing char - any single printable character
Controls the character used for vertical boxing lines.
A
character, such as the vertical bar, an exclamation mark, or
an asterisk, is normally used. This entry has no effect if
neither title boxing nor data boxing is used.

Horizontal boxing char - any single printable character
Controls the character used for horizontal boxing lines.
A
character, such as a dash or an asterisk, is normally used.
This entry has no effect if neither title boxing nor data
boxing is used.

Spaces between Columns - n
Controls the number of horizontal spaces between columns. A
number of one or two is normally used. If data boxing is
used, zero may be useful.

Lines after title - n
Controls the number of blank lines inserted after the title
line.
A number of one or two is normally used. If both
title boxing and data boxing are used, zero may be useful.

Line spacing - n
Controls the number of blank lines inserted between data
lines.
A number of zero causes single spacing of data. A
number of one causes double spacing of data. If data boxing
is used, zero may be useful.

Lines per page -

Controls the maximum number of lines on a page.
A number
between 50 and 60 is normal for regular forms, although
smaller and larger numbers are often useful with other
forms.
When the number is larger than the form can
accommodate, output will occur across form boundaries.

10-26

WORKING WITH REPORTS
9.

Page width - data,

Controls the maximum number of characters in a line across
the page.
The word data causes the page width to be
determined by the actual data. The number n specifies the
page width directly. In either case, CENTER* and JUSTIFY*
center and justify text based on page width. This entry has
no effect on the use of FILE*, which simply inserts a copy
of the specified file into the report listing.
10.

Left margin -

Controls the placement of the left margin by specifying how
many horizontal spaces to indent the entire line. A number
of zero is normally used.
11.

Date pattern - any legal date format
Controls the report listing format of data in date columns
and the contents of TODAY*. This date pattern may be the
same or different from the the date pattern used to
determine nonreport listing display and input format of date
values. A legal date format is the date January 2, 1980
typed as you want dates to appear in the report listing.~~
•

For days of the month, use 02 to specify leading zero, 2
preceded by a space to specify leading space, and just 2
to specify nonleading zero or space.

•

For months of the year, use 01 to specify leading zero,
1 preceded by a space to specify leading space, just 1
to specify nonleading zero or space for numbered months,
or three or more leading letters of January for named
months.
~~~-

•

For years, use 1980
digits.

•

For spacing between days, months, and years, use one or
more nondigit, nonletter printable characters (spaces,
dashes, slashes, and so on), as desired.

•

You can use any order of the three date parts you want.

for

four

digits

The following are examples of legal date patterns:
02-Jan-80
2-Jan-80
02-JAN-80
2-JAN-80
02-jan-80
2-jan-80

02-Jan-1980
2-Jan-1980
02-JAN-1980
2-JAN-1980
02-jan-1980
2-jan-1980

10-27

for

two

WORKING WITH REPORTS
02-January-80
2-Januar y-80
02-JANUARY-80
2-JANUARY-80
02-januar y-80
2-january-80

02-January-1980
2-January-1980
02-JANUARY-1980
2-JANUARY-1980
02-january-1980
2-january-1980

January 2, 1980

12.

01/02/80
1 /02 /80
1 I 2180
1/2/80

01/02/1980
1/02/1980
1/ 2/1980
1/2/1980

02/01/80
2/01/80
21 1 /80
2/1/80

02/01/1980
2/01/1980
21 1/1980
2/1/1980

Number pattern - any legal negative number format
Controls the report listing format of data in numeric
columns.
This number pattern may be the same or different
from the the number pattern used to determine nonreport
listing display and input format of numeric values. A legal
negative number format is the number -9000 typed as you want
negative numbers to appear in the report listing.
For sign, use leading
or
trailing
minus
sign,
• parentheses,
CR (for credit) or any other nondigit
printable characters.

•

For number separator character, use a
other nondigit printable character.

comma,

space

The following are examples of legal number patterns:
-9 000
9 000(9 000)
9 OOOCR

-9' 000
9' 000(9,000)
9,000CR

-9000
9000(9000)
9000CR

Since the default LAYOUT section entries are the ones needed to
produce the report listing that is being used for an example, no
changes need to be made to the LAYOUT section.

10-28

WORKING WITH REPORTS
10.2.3.4

Changing The TOP Section -

To change the TOP section, move the cursor to the TOP section in
the standard report procedure.
The following is displayed in the scrolling area:
@TOP
Format? TODAY* ' ' TIME* JUSTIFY* ' Page
CENTER* TABLE*
BLANK*

' PAGE*

Like the cursor, the question mark and prompt help to mark your
place in the section.
The current line is the line with the
question mark and prompt, as well as the cursor.
At this point, you could enter a new line format before the
first line format of the TOP section or move to another line of
the section by pressing a function key (such as the RETURN key
or the DOWN key). When you finish typing a line format, press
the RETURN key. Type one line format on each line.
For example, you want the top of your report pages to look
this:
30-Dec-81 10: 11 AM

Page 1

CURRENT INVENTORY
Thus, you need to change the default TOP section to
line formats:

have

these

section

you

@TOP
TODAY* ' ' TIME* JUSTIFY* ' Page ' PAGE*
BLANK*
CENTER* 'CURRENT INVENTORY'
BLANK*
Compare the standard TOP
specified line by line.

section

with

the

TOP

You want to:
1.

Keep the first line

Insert BLANK* between the first and second lines

Replace CENTER* TABLE* with CENTER* 'CURRENT INVENTORY'

Keep the last line

10-29

WORKING WITH REPORTS
Follow these steps to put a new heading in the TOP section.
screen will change after each step.
1.

The

Press the RETURN key to move to the second line.
The following is displayed in the scrolling area:
@TOP
TODAY* ' ' TIME* JUSTIFY* 'Page ' PAGE*
Format? CENTER* TABLE*
BLANK*

Type BLANK* after the question mark
key.

and

press

the

RETURN

The following is displayed in the scrolling area:
@TOP
TODAY* ' ' TIME* JUSTIFY* 'Page ' PAGE*
BLANK*
Format? CENTER* TABLE*
BLANK*

Type CENTER* 'CURRENT INVENTORY' after the question mark and
press the RETURN key.
The following is displayed in the scrolling area:
@TOP
TODAY* ' ' TIME* JUSTIFY* 'Page ' PAGE*
BLANK*
CENTER* 'CURRENT INVENTORY'
Format? CENTER* TABLE*
BLANK*

Press <DELETE LINE> to delete the current line.
The following is displayed in the scrolling area:
@TOP
TODAY* ' ' TIME* JUSTIFY* 'Page ' PAGE*
BLANK*
CENTER* 'CURRENT INVENTORY'
Format?
BLANK*

You are finished making changes to the TOP section.
Press
the ENTER key on the keypad to exit or position the cursor
at another section.

10-30

WORKING WITH REPORTS
10.2.3.5

Changing The BOTTOM Section -

To change the BOTTOM section of the report procedure,
cursor to the BOTTOM section.

move

the

Working with the BOTTOM section of a report procedure is similar
to working with the TOP section.
Since the default BOTTOM
section is empty, you would simply enter new line formats in the
same manner you did in the TOP section. Remember, you can use
column names in addition to keywords, text, and response area
names.
Since no new entries are required in the BOTTOM section to
produce the report listing in this example, no changes need to
be made to that section.

10.2.3.6

Adding A WHERE Or EXCEPT Section -

To add a WHERE or EXCEPT section to the report procedure, move
the cursor past the last section. These conditional sections
are the only sections that are actually added to a report
procedure; the others are always there and can only be changed.
To add a new WHERE section, type @WHERE followed by a valid
condition.
To add a new EXCEPT section, type @EXCEPT followed
by a valid condition. Valid conditions in WHERE and EXCEPT
sections of report procedures are identical to valid conditions
in optional WHERE and EXCEPT phrases, as described in Chapter 7.
Like TOP and BOTTOM sections, WHERE and EXCEPT sections contain
line formats.
Therefore, once you add these sections, working
with them is similar to working with TOP and BOTTOM sections,
including entering line formats.
For example, to decide which WHERE or EXCEPT sections you want
to add to the standard report procedure being used in the
examples so far, compare the table format with the desired
report format.
In the report listing, you want to output
subtotal and total lines differently from the way they appear in
the table.
You also want to highlight and label lines where
there are fewer than 20 items in stock.

10-31

WORKING WITH REPORTS
Thus, you want to add the following three WHERE sections:

= PN, which will control the subtotal lines
@WHERE TOTAL* = TOTAL, which will control the total line
@WHERE TOTAL*

@WHERE QTY < 20, which will control the low quantity lines
Before using CHANGE to add these WHERE sections to the report
procedure, you must decide which line formats will make up each
of the new WHERE sections.
The following line formats insert the desired subtotal lines
the report procedure:

BLANK*
Inserts one blank line.
SPACE*(6) 'Total for ' PN ' is ' QTY
Inserts six spaces, the text "Total for ", the value
in the PN column, the text " is ", and the value in
the QTY column.
BLANK*
Inserts one blank line.
The following line formats insert the desired total line in
report procedure:

the

BLANK*
Inserts one blank line.
'Total for all parts is' SPACE*(3) QTY
Inserts the text "Total for all parts
spaces, and the value in the QTY column.

is",

three

The following line format inserts the desired low quantity lines
in the report procedure:
PRINT* PN,WHOUSE,QTY ' *** LOW'
Inserts the values in each column under the correct
column headings with the text " *** LOW" added after
the value for QTY.

10-32

WORKING WITH REPORTS
Remember to use the keyword PRINT* in WHERE and EXCEPT sections
to line up column values under the correct column headings in
the report listing.
The following are the three WHERE sections that must be added to
the report procedure:
@WHERE TOTAL* = PN
BLANK*
SPACE*(6) 'Total for ' PN ' is ' QTY
BLANK*
@WHERE TOTAL* = TOTAL
BLANK*
'Total for all parts is' SPACE*(3) QTY
@WHERE QTY < 20
PRINT* PN,WHOUSE,QTY ' *** LOW'
Make sure you enter these WHERE sections exactly as shown, with
one line format to a line. Press the RETURN key after typing
each line format. When you are finished, press the ENTER key to
exit or position the cursor at another section.

10.2.3.7

Changing A WHERE Or EXCEPT Section -

To change a WHERE or EXCEPT section in the report
move the cursor to the WHERE or EXCEPT section.

procedure,

Remember that changing WHERE and EXCEPT sections is
changing TOP and BOTTOM sections.

similar

When you change the condition in a
remember that the new condition
described in Chapter 7.

10-33

WHERE or EXCEPT section,
must be a valid one, as

WORKING WITH REPORTS
10.2.3.8

Deleting A WHERE Or EXCEPT Section -

To delete WHERE or EXCEPT sections in the report procedure, move
the cursor to the section you want to delete.
The WHERE and EXCEPT sections require the deletion of the
keyword WHERE or EXCEPT and the associated condition if the
WHERE or EXCEPT section is to be completely deleted.
To delete the original WHERE section from the default report
procedure is the last step in producing the desired report
procedure.
To do this, follow these steps.
each step.
1.

The screen

will

change

after

Move the cursor to the beginning of the WHERE section to
deleted.

The following is displayed in the scrolling area:
Format? @WHERE TOTAL* <> 0
BAR* ALL*
PRINT* ALL*
BLANK*
2.

Press <DELETE LINE> to delete the current line and then
press the RETURN key to move the cursor to the next line.
The following will be displayed in the scrolling area:
Format? BAR* ALL*
PRINT* ALL*
BLANK*

Press <DELETE LINE> to delete the current line and then
press the RETURN key to move the cursor to the next line.
The following will be displayed in the scrolling area:
Format? PRINT* ALL*
BLANK*

Press <DELETE LINE> to delete the current line and then
press the RETURN key to move the cursor to the next line.
The following will be displayed in the scrolling area:
Format? BLANK*

10-34

WORKING WITH REPORTS

Press <DELETE LINE> to delete the current line.
The following will be displayed in the scrolling area:
Format?

You are finished deleting the WHERE section.
Press the
ENTER key on the keypad to exit or move the cursor to
another section to make other changes.

10.2.3.9

Special WHERE Sections -

Like other WHERE sections, the special WHERE sections have a
condition and one or more line formats. Only the conditions
have special meanings, not the line formats.
You specify the
line formats the same way you specify line formats in the other
WHERE sections.
There are three
special
keywords
that
constitute valid conditions when used as part of WHERE sections:
BEGIN*, END*, and ALL.
WHERE BEGIN*
A WHERE BEGIN* section specifies that the line formats are to
apply to an insertion in the report listing prior to any other.
This WHERE section can be used to produce a cover sheet for the
main report listing or or any other information you want to
appear before the main report listing.
WHERE BEGIN* sections are useful for report listings with
several pages. Unlike the TOP section, which appears at the top
of every report page, the BEGIN* insertion at the front of a
report appears only once.
You can use WHERE BEGIN* sections to:
•

Insert a heading at the top of the first report page

•

Insert a title page in a report listing

•

Insert introductory text in the front of a report listing

•

Insert a graph at the beginning of a report listing

10-35

WORKING WITH REPORTS
The TOP section does not affect report listing pages produced by
WHERE BEGIN*. The TOP section affects only insertions on report
listing pages where it can start the insertion on the first line
of the page. For example, when you use a WHERE BEGIN* section
to insert a report heading at the top of the first report page,
the TOP section will not insert anything on that page. Instead,
the column titles usually would appear next.
The TOP section
does affect insertions, however, on all other report pages,
including those produced by a WHERE END* section.
WHERE END*
A WHERE END* section specifies that the line formats are to
apply to an insertion in the report listing after the BOTTOM
section insertion on the last regular report listing page.
You can use WHERE END* sections to:
•

Insert a summary at the end of a report listing

•

Insert other text at the end of a report listing

•

Insert a graph at the end of a report listing

The END* insertion appears on the same page as the last BOTTOM
section insertion, unless a line format in the WHERE END*
section contains the keyword NEWPAGE* or NEWPAGE*(n).
A column name used in a WHERE END* line format inserts the
column value from the last line in the table or the worksheet
being used.
WHERE ALL
A WHERE ALL section specifies that the line formats are to apply
to all lines in the table or worksheet being used. ALL is a
valid condition as described in Chapter 7. WHERE ALL sections
can be used to present all the lines in a special format.

10.2.4

Seeing Report Sections With LIST

Remember, you can use the LIST command to see the sections in
report procedure.
For example, to list the report procedure changed
previous examples, enter the following command:
LIST existing QUANTITIES

10-36

a
the

WORKING WITH REPORTS
If you use the LIST command, the sections of the report
procedure QUANTITIES are displayed in the scrolling area:
! QUANTITIES C:30-Dec-82 04:25 PM M:30-Dec-82 06:25 PM ADE V2.1

@COLUMNS
PN
WHOUSE
QTY

<Part-Number>
<Warehouse>
<Quantity>

@LAYOUT
Title Boxing
Data Boxing
Vertical
boxing char
Horizontal boxing char
Spaces between Columns
Lines after title
Lines spacing
Lines per page
Page width
Left margin
Date pattern
Number pattern

<l>
<->

<2>
<1>

<O>

<50>
<data>
<O>
< 2-Jan-80>
<-9' 000 >

@TOP
TODAY* ' ' TIME* JUSTIFY* ' Page ' PAGE*
BLANK*
CENTER* 'CURRENT INVENTORY'
BLANK*
@BOTTOM
@WHERE TOTAL* = PN
BLANK*
SPACE*(6) 'Total for ' PN ' is ' QTY
BLANK*
@WHERE TOTAL* = TOTAL
BLANK*
'Total for all parts is' SPACE*(3) QTY
@WHERE QTY < 20
PRINT* PN,WHOUSE,QTY

' *** LOW'

10-37

WORKING WITH REPORTS
10.2.5

Using A Changed Report

To see the new report listing after a change or a series of
changes to the report procedure, follow the same steps as for
running the standard report procedure.
For example, to see the report listing produced by the report
procedure that was changed in the previous examples of this
chapter, enter:
QUANTITIES reporting the table WORKSHEET
If you entered all the changes correctly as described in the
previous examples, you will see a report listing similar to the
one below.
Page 1

30-Dec-82 08: 11 PM
CURRENT INVENTORY

--------------------------------Quantity
Warehouse
Part
I
I
I

Number

I
I
I

--------------------------------P01
P01
P01

W1
W2
W3

128
135
142

Total for P01 is 405
P02
P02
P02

W1
W2
W3

92
167
251

Total for P02 is 510
P03
P03
P03

W1
W2
W3

48
74
10

Total for P03 is 132
P04
P04
P04

W1
W2
W3

65
143
202

Total for P04 is 410
Total for all parts is

10-38

1 '457

*** LOW

WORKING WITH REPORTS
10.2.6

Using A Report On Other Tables

You can use the same report procedure with any table or
worksheet that has all the columns in the COLUMNS section of the
report procedure. The table or worksheet can have extra columns
that are not in the COLUMNS section, but it cannot be missing
any columns that are in the COLUMNS section.
The COLUMNS
section can be changed to add missing columns.

10.2.7

Using FILE* To Produce More Complex Reports

The following are some ways the keyword FILE* can help you
more complex reports:
•

make

Insert a graph in a report listing.
Use the GRAPH command to produce the graph and put it into a
file using an optional TO FILE phrase. When you make the
report procedure, use FILE* to insert the file with the
graph in the report listing.

•

Produce a report with data from two tables.
Make two report procedures. When you run the first report
procedure, use an optional TO FILE phrase to specify a file
for output. Then use FILE* in the second report procedure
to insert the first report listing from the file inside the
second report.

10-39

CHAPTER 11
MANAGING TABLES, VERBS, AND REPORTS

Most, but not all, of the information in this chapter has been
introduced previously in separate discussions of working with
tables, verbs, and reports.
This chapter integrates this
information to emphasize what is common in working with tables,
verbs, and reports.
This chapter describes:

• Listing names of tables, verbs, and reports
• Outlining the columns in a table
• Making a new table, verb, or report
• Renaming a table, verb, or report
• Erasing a table, verb, or report
The command examples in this chapter use an ADE directory that
contains one table named PARTS, one verb named TASK, and one
report named QUANTITIES.

11.1

LISTING NAMES OF TABLES, VERBS, AND REPORTS

The NAMES command lists the names of tables, verbs, and reports
in an ADE directory.
The default form of the NAMES command,
which lists the contents 'Of your ADE directory on the terminal,
is:
NAMES of ALL

11-1

MANAGING TABLES, VERBS, AND REPORTS
The following information would be displayed
area:
Name

* Tables *
PARTS

* Verbs *
TASK

* Reports *
QUANTITIES

11.1.1

the

scrolling

Time

Access

Description

Date Saved

Sample Table.

30-Dec-1981 09:30

SELF

Sample Verb.

30-Dec-1981 09:45

SELF

Sample Report.

30-Dec-1981 10:00

SELF

Specifying What To List

By entering TABLES, VERBS, or REPORTS in place of ALL in the
NAMES command, you can list tables only, verbs only, or reports
only.
For example:
NAMES of TABLES
This NAMES command would list the names of tables
and reports would not be listed.

11.1.2

only.

Verbs

Specifying Where To Send The List

Besides displaying the list of names on the terminal, you can
also list them on the line printer or a printer attached to
terminal, copy them into a file, or list them on another device.
To specify where to send the list, enter one of the following
after_ ALL, TABLES, VERBS, or REPORTS in the NAMES command:
TO PRINTER

To list the names on the line printer.

TO PORT

To list the names on a printer attached to
the terminal.

TO FILE filename

To copy the list of names into a file.

TO DEVICE devicename To list the names on the given device.

11-2

MANAGING TABLES, VERBS, AND REPORTS
Examples:
~

NAMES of ALL TO PRINTER
NAMES of VERBS TO FILE VERB.LST
For more information, see the NAMES commmand in Chapter 12.

11.2

OUTLINING THE COLUMNS IN A TABLE

You can use the OUTLINE command to list the column
table or the worksheet.

names

For example:
OUTLINE of table PARTS
The following information would be displayed
area:

the

scrolling

** OUTLINE OF TABLE PARTS **
PN
PNAME
WHOUSE
COLOR
WEIGHT
QTY

(KEY)

(NUMERIC)
(NUMERIC)

There are 9 lines and 6 columns.

11.3

MAKING A NEW TABLE, VERB, OR REPORT

Remember, you use the MAKE command to make a new worksheet (to
save as a table), a new verb, or a new report. ADE prompts you
for a worksheet name, a verb name, or a report name and enters
the name you supply into your ADE directory.

11-3

MANAGING TABLES, VERBS, AND REPORTS
Examples:
MAKE new WORKSHEET called PERSONNEL
MAKE new VERB called TASK
MAKE new REPORT called QUANTITIES using table WORKSHEET
NOTE
The MAKE command works differently for worksheets,
verbs, and reports.
See the following chapters for
step-by-step descriptions:
•

For worksheets, Chapter 5, "Producing A Table"

•

For verbs, Chapter 9, "Working With Verbs"

•

For reports, Chapter 10, "Working With Reports"

You can also use the MAKE command to make a new
worksheet.

11.4

column

the

RENAMING A TABLE, VERB, OR REPORT

You use the RENAME command to rename a table, verb, or report.
ADE prompts you for both the existing name and the new name.
When you enter the new name, be sure to follow the ADE naming
rules for tables, verbs, and reports.
The RENAME command
changes names only. Your data remains unchanged.
Examples:
To rename the table PARTS
command:

OLD.PARTS,

enter

the

following

enter

the

following

RENAME existing PARTS to table OLD.PARTS
To rename
command:

the

verb

TASK

OLD.TASK,

RENAME existing TASK to verb OLD.TASK

11-4

MANAGING TABLES, VERBS, AND REPORTS
To rename the report QUANTITIES
following command:

OLD.QUANTITIES,

enter

the

If you now use the NAMES command to list the names of
tables, verbs, and reports, the new names are displayed.

your

RENAME existing QUANTITIES to report OLD.QUANTITIES

You can also use the RENAME command to rename the
columns in the worksheet.

11.5

worksheet

ERASING A TABLE, VERB, OR REPORT

To save disk space, you should always use the ERASE command to
delete tables, verbs, and reports that you no longer need.
However, after you erase a table, a verb, or a report, you
cannot recover it.
To protect your tables, verbs, and reports from being erased by
mistake, ADE gives you a chance to reconfirm the ERASE command.
For example, suppose you enter the following command:
ERASE existing PARTS
After you enter the ERASE command, ADE asks you:
Do you want to erase the table PARTS (YES or NO) ?
If you really want to erase the PARTS table, type YES and
the RETURN key. ADE tells you what it has done:

press

The Table "PARTS" has been erased.
If you do not want to delete the PARTS table, type NO and
the RETURN key. Again, ADE tells you what it has done:
The Table "PARTS" is NOT erased.

11-5

press

PART THREE - REFERENCE INFORMATION

CHAPTER 12
COMMANDS

This chapter lists all ADE commands in alphabetical order.
command description includes the following information:

Each

Purpose
A brief statement of what the command does.
Formats
Shows both your input and
following conventions:

ADE's

command

prompts,

using

the

UPPER CASE

(also printed in red) means type
as shown.

lower case

represents ADE's command line prompts.

underlined
lower case

means replace words with a name or expression.
For example, replace table with a table name and
column with a column name.

All command defaults appear in angle brackets.
Effects
Describes how the command works.

12-1

words

exactly

COMMANDS
For some commands, the following information is also included:
Examples
Shows examples of the command.
Entering The Command
Lists rules for entering the command.
Using the Command
Describes how to use the command interactively and in a verb.
Function Keys
Lists active function keys.

12-2

COMMANDS
Table 12-1 gives a summary of the ADE commands grouped by
most important or primary functions.
Table 12-1:

their

Summary of ADE Commands by Function

Command Type

Description

Commands

Management
Commands

Perform housekeeping
tasks.

MA KE , GET , SA VE ,
RENAME, ERASE,
BACKUP, ALLOW,
COPY, SET, EXIT

Input
Commands

Let you enter data.

ENTER, CHANGE

Output
Commands

Display data and
information.

LIST, GRAPH,
HELP, NAMES,
OUTLINE
Reports are also
forms of output.

Arithmetic
Commands

Perform arithmetic
on number data.

ADD, SUBTRACT,
MULTIPLY, DIVIDE,
CALCULATE, TALLY,
TOTAL

Table and
Worksheet
Commands

Perform various
operations on a
table and/or the
worksheet.

MOVE, PICK, SORT,
MERGE, APPEND,
COMBINE, UPDATE

Special Verb
Commands

Perform special
operations in verbs.

REMARK, ASK

Report
Preparation
Commands

Prepare the worksheet
for use by report
procedures.

BREAK, TOTAL

Training
Command

Performs online
training.

TRAIN

12-3

COMMANDS
ADD
12.1

ADD

Purpose
The ADD command adds worksheet columns or values.
Use the ADD command when you want to add two columns, a column
and a value, or two values. To add more than two columns or do
more complex arithmetic, use the CALCULATE command.
Formats
ADD item item to item result in column <SUM>
ADD item item to item result in column <SUM> column
where item is either a column name or a value
column is a column name
Entering the ADD Command
You can use a WHERE or EXCEPT phrase to add a subset of
worksheet lines.
When you enter the ADD command, place the
WHERE or EXCEPT phrase after the result column name.
Effects
•

The ADD command places the
worksheet column.

result

new

However, when you specify two values and the
no lines, the ADD command displays the
scrolling area of the screen.
•

existing

worksheet has
result in the

You specify the column names and the values you want to add.
You also specify the column name for the result. When you
use a new column name for the result, the column is added to
the worksheet automatically.
When you use an existing
column name for the result, the old values in the column are
replaced by the results of the addition.

12-4

COMMANDS
ADD
Examples
•

Adding two columns
For every line in the worksheet, the ADD command adds the
two column values in the line and places their sum on the
same line in the result column.

A B

•

1
2

A
ADD item A to B result in SUM

SUM
2

Adding a value to a column
The ADD command adds the value to every value in the
and places each sum in the result column.
A
1
2

ADD item 1 to A result in SUM

3 ::

4'·::

•

SUM

column

Adding two values
When the worksheet contains one or more lines, the ADD
command adds the two values and places their sum in every
line of the result column.
A

·A

1
2

ADD item 1 to 2 result in A

3
3

3
4

If the worksheet has no lines, ADD displays
the scrolling area of the screen.

12-5

the

result

COMMANDS
ADD
Using the ADD Command
Arithmetic Rules
•

After you add two numbers, the result
numeric column.

column

always

•

After you add a number to a date column, the
is always a date column.

•

Nonnumeric characters and blanks have the value zero.

•

Adding to a blank in a date column results in a blank.

result

column

Decimal Places
ADE keeps track of decimal places for numbers in numeric
columns. All values in a numeric column have the same number of
decimal places. However, ADE does not keep track of decimal
places for numbers in character columns.
When you add numeric columns, the number of decimal places in
the result column has the larger number of decimal places
present in either column or the specified value, or the number
explicitly stated in a ROUND or TRUNCATE optional phrase.
Rounding/Truncating
You can round or truncate results of arithmetic commands by
using the optional phrases ROUND # or TRUNCATE # at the end of
the command line, where "#" is the number of decimal places you
want the result to be rounded or truncated to. For example:
DJ i tern
~0

to ;~~ result in ('
expression

result in column

12-6

COMMANDS
ALLOW
12.2

ALLOW

Purpose
The ALLOW command assigns the
tables, verbs, and reports.

class

user

who

can

access

Use the ALLOW command when you want to grant other
read access to your tables, verbs, or reports.

ADE

users

its

access

Formats
ALLOW access to table by <SELF>
ALLOW access to table by <SELF> user-class
ALLOW access to verb by <SELF>
ALLOW access to verb by <SELF> user-class
ALLOW access to report by <SELF>
ALLOW access to report by <SELF> user-class
where table is a table name
verb is a verb name
repQrt is a report name
user-class is SELF, GROUP, or WORLD
Effects
•

The table, verb,
changed.

report

•

If the table, verb, or report already has
access, the ALLOW command has no effect.

•

ADE directories are created with WORLD access, if host
system defaults permit, so that any ADE user can access them
with the NAMES command.

•

ADE tables, verbs, and reports are created with SELF access,
so that only the owner or a privileged user can access them
unless you use the ALLOW command.

12-7

you

specify

has
the

specified

COMMANDS
ALLOW
Examples
To grant everyone access to your INVENTORY table, enter:
ALLOW access to INVENTORY by WORLD
To grant members of your group access to your TASK verb, enter:
ALLOW access to TASK by GROUP
To permit access to your QUANTITIES
yourself, enter:
ALLOW access to QUANTITIES by SELF

12-8

report

procedure

only

COMMANDS
APPEND
12.3

APPEND

Purpose
The APPEND command brings lines from a table into the bottom
the worksheet.

Format
APPEND to worksheet the table table
where table is a table name
Entering the APPEND Command
The names and types of the worksheet columns must match the
names and types of the columns in the table, although the
worksheet can contain more columns than are in the table.
Effects
The lines in the table you specify are copied into the bottom of
the worksheet. The table remains unchanged.
Example
To append the lines in the table
enter:

PERSONNEL

the

worksheet,

APPEND to worksheet the table PERSONNEL
The worksheet prior to the APPEND command, the table PERSONNEL,
and the worksheet after the APPEND command are shown:
BADGE

NAME

DEPT

2
4

SMITH
BAKER
EATON

SALES
SALES
SALES

BADGE

NAME

DEPT

BADGE

NAME

DEPT

ADAMS
MOORE
JONES

MFG
MFG
MFG

2
4

SMITH
BAKER
EATON
ADAMS
MOORE
JONES

SALES
SALES
SALES
MFG
MFG
MFG

3
5

6
1

3
5

Worksheet

PERSONNEL

12-9

New Worksheet

COMMANDS
APPEND
Using the APPEND Command
•

Use both APPEND and UPDATE, along with SORT, to keep records
(such as employee records) up to date.
Enter both new employee data and changes for old employees
(such as pay increases and changes of address) into a small
table that you keep separate from your large PERSONNEL
table.
Make sure the small table has the same columns as
PERSONNEL.
When you need to update PERSONNEL:
Use APPEND to append new employee data to PERSONNEL.
Use SORT to order PERSONNEL.
Use UPDATE
PERSONNEL.

•

put

changes

for

old

employees

into

Use APPEND to help prepare reports.
Every day you take orders for parts. Once a week you report
to your manager on sales for the current month; once a
month you report total sales for the month and for the
year-to-date.
For the best use of ADE, take advantage of APPEND.
Keep
your current orders separate from monthly and year-to-date
sales. Make sure the tables have the same columns.
When
you need a report for your manager, append your current
orders with the monthly and year-to-date sales.
Sort this
combined information. Produce new totals and then use LIST
TO PRINTER or a Report to produce a printed report.
Hint: If you write reports regularly, make verbs to produce
the reports for you. To print a report, simply run a verb.

•

You can use a WHERE or EXCEPT phrase to append less than all
of the table lines.
When you enter the APPEND command,
place the WHERE or EXCEPT phrase after the table name.

•

You can use an IN phrase to append lines to the worksheet
from a table in another area. When you enter the APPEND
command, place the IN phrase after the table name.

12-10

COMMANDS
ASK
12.4

ASK

Purpose
The ASK command prompts the user for a
reply in an internal storage area.
retrieve that text.

reply and stores the
Other commands can then

The ASK command is mainly for use in verbs and lets you make
verbs that work differently based on user input when the verb is
running.
Format
ASK for response number number using message message
where number is the number of a RESPONSE area (1-5)
message is the prompting message requesting input
Entering the ASK Command
•

Enter the ASK command as a step when you make or change the
verb.
ASK prompts you for two inputs: a response number
and a message.

•

For number, enter the number of the response area where you
want to store the message. You have five response areas.
You do not have to specify response areas in order. You can
use RESPONSE3 before RESPONSE1 if you want to.

•

For message, enter the prompt or question you want used when
the verb is running. The message can be up to 40 characters
long. Include a question mark if asking a question.
ADE
uses only what you provide as the message. The message can
ask for a command line or part of a command line, including
one or more of the following:
A command name
A table name
A verb name
A report procedure name
A list of columns
A file specification
A device specification

12-11

COMMANDS
ASK
•

In other steps in the verb, specify RESPONSEn where you want
the user's answer used as input. The n is the number of the
response area you used in the associated ASK command.

Effects
•

When the verb is running, ASK displays
question for the user to respond to.

the

prompt

•

ASK puts the user's input into the specified response
Each response area has the following characteristics:

area.

Each response area is one of the five areas that exist.
Each response area can contain only one value at a time.
The value can be up to 132 characters long.
Each response area's value can be used many times. When
a verb uses the value in a response area, it does not
change the value.
The only way to change the values in response
to respond to other ASK commands.

areas

The values in response areas are not saved when the user
exits ADE.
•

When the verb reaches the step where the response area name
is a command input, the verb uses the text stored in the
response area in place of the response area name.

Example
Suppose the verb MY.TASK contains the following steps:
Step
Step

1
2

ASK for response number 2 using message WHAT TABLE?
GET table RESPONSE2

Suppose you run the verb MY.TASK
typing the table name INVENTORY.

and

answer

the

question

The first step:
Step 1 ASK for response number 2 using message WHAT TABLE?
The verb MY.TASK is running.
WHAT TABLE?

INVENTORY

12-12

COMMANDS
ASK
The next step:
Step 2 GET table INVENTORY
The verb MY.TASK is running.
For more information on how to use ASK
verbs, see Chapter 9.

12-13

and

RESPONSE

areas

COMMANDS
BACKUP
12. 5

BACKUP

Purpose
The BACKUP
worksheet.

command

restores

the

version

the

The previous version is the current worksheet without
change you made to it in this ADE session.

the

last

Format
BACKUP to previous worksheet

Effects
•

ADE keeps one backup copy of the worksheet. Each time you
change the worksheet, ADE makes a new backup copy. The
BACKUP command makes the backup copy the current worksheet.

•

You cannot use BACKUP twice in a row to restore two
back.

changes

Using the BACKUP Command
The BACKUP command is very
effects
of
a
command
dramatically.

useful in
that
has

12-14

undoing
changed

the
the

undesired
worksheet

COMMANDS
BREAK
12.6

BREAK

Purpose
The BREAK command inserts new lines in the worksheet after lines
in which the specified columns change their values.
Format
BREAK on columns columns
where columns is a list of columns
Entering the BREAK Command
•

You can specify the columns to use as:
A list of column names, separated by commas
The keyword ALL, which means use all the columns
The keyword OMIT, followed by a list of column names,
separated by commas, which means use all the columns
except the ones in the list

•

While you can use the BREAK command for any number of
columns, it works best with a small number of columns. When
you specify many columns, the worksheet changes extensively.
The new worksheet may be hard to read and use.

•

Before you enter the BREAK command, be sure the data is
sorted in the columns you plan to specify, since a break
line will be inserted each time the value changes in these
columns.

Effects
When you specify one column,
worksheet as follows:

the

BREAK

command

changes

•

It inserts a new line in the worksheet
changes in the column you specify.

wherever

•

It adds a new column named BREAK* to the worksheet.

•

It places the following data on each new line:

the
value

In the specified column, the value at each break point
In the new BREAK* column,
column
12-15

the

name

the

specified

COMMANDS
BREAK
The command works basically the same way for several columns as
for one column.
However, the order in which you specify the
columns determines how the break lines are arranged.
Examples
Suppose you have a sorted worksheet and want to
command on one column:

use

the

BREAK

BREAK on columns PN
The worksheet before and after the BREAK command is:
PN

WHOUSE

QTY

WHOUSE

QTY

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2
W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35
40
52
100
67

P01
P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35

W1
W1
W2
W2

40
52
100
67

--->

BREAK*

Suppose you have the same sorted worksheet as
want to use the BREAK command on two columns:

before

and

now

BREAK on columns PN,WHOUSE
The worksheet before and after the BREAK command is:
PN

WHOUSE

QTY

WHOUSE

QTY

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2
W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35
40
52
100
67

P01
P01
P01
P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W1
W2
W2
W2

50
78

W1
W1
W1
W2
W2

40
52

--->

29
35

100
67

BREAK*

WHOUSE
WHOUSE
PN
WHOUSE
WHOUSE
PN

Then, for
A break occurs each time the part number changes.
each part number, a break occurs each time the warehouse
changes.
12-16

COMMANDS
BREAK
Using the BREAK Command
The BREAK command helps you prepare data for reports.
The new
lines that BREAK inserts in the worksheet "mark" points where
values change in specified columns.
Before using the BREAK command, you have no easy way to specify
the points where the values in a column change. After you use
BREAK, however, you can specify the change points by using a
WHERE phrase that refers to the new break lines.
Producing ~ Simple Report Listing with ADE Commands
In order to produce a simple report listing that separates
data in the worksheet by the values in one column:
1.

Sort the data in the column with the SORT command.

Insert break lines using the BREAK command on the column.

Get rid of unneeded lines with the PICK command.

List the worksheet with the LIST command.

the

Producing ~More Complex Report Listing with ~ Report Procedure
A report procedure, which specifies how to present the data in a
table or the worksheet, gives you more ways to change the format
of data than do the ADE commands by themselves.
A report procedure has several sections. In the WHERE section,
you specify a condition and the action to take for lines that
meet the condition (such as printing some text or starting a new
page of the report). There is a similar type of section, the
EXCEPT section, in which you specify a condition and the action
to take for lines that do not meet the condition. In these
sections of a report procedure, you can specify the break lines
produced by BREAK the same way you specify break lines in
commands.
For more information on report procedures, see
Chapter 10.
You can also produce reports that contain subtotals
totals. See the TOTAL command.

12-17

and

column

COMMANDS
CALCULATE
12. 7

CALCULATE

Purpose
The CALCULATE command evaluates an algebraic expression you
supply for each line of the worksheet and places the results in
a column.
The CALCULATE command performs
arithmetic
operations
on
worksheet columns and values, like the basic arithmetic commands
(ADD, SUBTRACT, MULTIPLY, and DIVIDE), but can involve more
complex operations.
One CALCULATE command can perform the
function of several basic arithmetic commands.
Formats
CALCULATE expression expression result in column <CAL>
CALCULATE expression

express~on

result in column <CAL> column

where expression is the expression to be evaluated
column is a column name
Entering the CALCULATE Command
•

For expression, enter an arithmetic expression composed of:
Column names
Numbers
Arithmetic operators (+, -,

* /)

Parentheses · ()
•

All column
worksheet.

names

the

current

•

All numbers must be valid ADE numeric values in the
numeric format. See_Chapter 4.

default

•

The following chart shows the arithmetic operations that you
can perform:
Operation
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division

you

specify

must

Symbol

Example

Result

2+1
2-1
2*3
6/2

3
1
6
3

*I
12-18

COMMANDS
CALCULATE
•

You cannot use spaces in an arithmetic expression. When an
expression contains spaces, CALCULATE evaluates only the
portion of the expression before the first space.

•

The arithmeti~ ~xpression supplied must use existing column
names, valid numeric values in the default numeric format,
and arithmetic operators.
Use
parentheses
to
group
subexpressions and control the order of evaluation.

•

You can use date column names in an arithmetic expression as
long as the expression or subexpression that includes date
columns is correct and the default date format is in effect.
You cannot use actual date values in any format in an
arithmetic expression.

Effects
The CALCULATE command evaluates the arithmetic expression you
supply for each worksheet line. It places the result in the
column you specify. If the worksheet has no lines, the result
is displayed in the scrolling area.
Using the CALCULATE Command
•

When CALCULATE evaluates an
expression,
operations in the following order:
expressions

performs

It evaluates all
left to right.

It performs multiplications and divisions from
right.

left

It performs additions
right.

left

and

inside

parentheses

subtractions

from

Thus, the format of your arithmetic expression determines
the result. Use parentheses to control how expressions are
evaluated.
•

The CALCULATE command follows the same arithmetic rules and
handles decimal places the same way as the four arithmetic
commands (ADD, SUBTRACT, MULTIPLY, and DIVIDE).

•

You can use a WHERE or EXCEPT phrase to calculate values for
a subset of worksheet lines. When you enter the CALCULATE
command, place the WHERE or EXCEPT phrase after the result
column name.

12-19

COMMANDS
CALCULATE
Examples
CALCULATE expression Q1+Q2+Q3+Q4 result in column YTD.TOTAL
CALCULATE expression (Q1+Q2+Q3+Q4)/4 result in column AVG
CALCULATE expression Q1+Q2+Q3+Q4 result in column YTD.TOTAL
WHERE COST.CTR EQ 3666
Rounding/Truncating
You can round or truncate results of arithmetic commands by
using the optional phrases ROUND # or TRUNCATE # at the end of
the command line, where "#" is the number of decimal places you
want the result to be rounded or truncated to. For example:
ADD item 1 to 2 result in SUM ROUND 2
CALCULATE expression A + B result in column CAL TRUNCATE 3

12-20

COMMANDS
CHANGE
12.8

CHANGE

Purpose
The CHANGE command has three functions:
•

Changes values at specific locations in the worksheet.
You
specify these locations by specifying columns and lines.

•

Changes steps in a verb.

•

Changes sections in a report procedure.

Formats
CHANGE existing <WORKSHEET> columns <ALL> columns
in lines <ALL> where-except phrase
CHANGE existing <WORKSHEET> verb
CHANGE existing <WORKSHEET> report
where columns specify the columns to use
where-except phrase is a valid WHERE or EXCEPT phrase
verb is a verb name
repQrt is a report name
Entering the CHANGE Command
•

The columns you use can be:
A list of column names, separated by commas
The keyword ALL, which means use all the columns
The keyword OMIT, followed by a list
separated by commas

column

names,

•

You can specify worksheet lines with a WHERE or EXCEPT
phrase by entering the keyword WHERE or the keyword EXCEPT
followed by a condition.

•

You can specify a verb with any existing verb name.

•

You can specify a report with any existing report name.

12-21

COMMANDS
CHANGE
Effects
Worksheet
•

~ha~ge~

After you enter the CHANGE WORKSHEET command:
The screen clears.
One at a time, the worksheet lines that meet any WHERE
or EXCEPT phrase condition you entered are displayed.
You are prompted, for each line,
into the columns you specified.

•

enter

new

values

The names of the columns to be changed are displayed on the
screen. A question mark follows each column name. A row of
dots appears at the first column, between the column name
and the question mark. This row of dots always appears at
the column awaiting your data.
The cursor waits at the
first column for your data.
The following is an example of this column prompting:
NAME ••••••.••. ?

BADGE. NUMBER
DATE.HIRED
DEPT

?
?

a new value after each question mark and press the
• Enter
RETURN key. Use the DELETE key to correct typing mistakes.
To keep the same value in a column, just press the RETURN
key.
The row of dots moves from column to column as you
enter values.
The following is an example after entering several values:
NAME
BADGE. NUMBER
DATE.HIRED

? SM ITH
? 4

? 5-Jan-81

DE PT • ••..•.•.. ?

•

If any columns are restricted to numbers or dates, you must
enter the correct kind of value.
When you enter an
incorrect value, the CHANGE command:
Deletes the incorrect value
Displays an error message in the scrolling area
Moves the cursor back to the beginning of the column
you can· reenter the value for that column

12-22

COMMANDS
CHANGE
•

After you finish changing values in a worksheet line, the
CHANGE command continues to display lines and prompt you to
enter new values.
This process continues automatically
until you have changed values in all the worksheet lines
that meet the WHERE or EXCEPT phrase condition you entered
or until you press the ENTER key or use CTRL/C to exit. You
can press the ENTER key or use CTRL/C at any column, while
working on any worksheet line.

•

If you press the ENTER key, the CHANGE command replaces the
old values in the worksheet with the new values you entered.

•

If you press CTRL/C, the CHANGE command does not replace the
old values in the worksheet with the new values you entered.

•

Remember that the CHANGE command changes data in the
worksheet only.
You must use the SAVE command to save the
new data as a table.

Verb and Report Changes
e

After you enter the CHANGE VERB or CHANGE REPORT command,
the verb steps or the report sections that you are changing
appear on the screen.

•

When you change verb steps, you make changes by entering new
steps and by pressing function keys.

•

When you change report sections, you make changes by
entering new line formats or new values and by pressing
function keys.

Function Keys
At any point where CHANGE expects input, the active
keys are displayed at the bottom of the screen.

function

Worksheet Changes
The following function keys are active while you use the
WORKSHEET command:

CHANGE

<HELP>

Displays more detailed information
ADE expects as input next.

about

Rewrites the screen so you can see
clearly.

the

12-23

what

display

COMMANDS
CHANGE
<RETURN>

Moves the cursor down to the next column.

<DOWN>

Moves the cursor down to the next column.

<UP>

Moves the cursor back up to the previous column.

<SKIP>

Moves the cursor to the first column of the next
line entry.

<TOP>

Moves the
grouping.

cursor

the

top

Moves the cursor
column grouping.

down

the

bottom

the

Moves the cursor so that you can put a new
entry between two existing line entries.

line

<FIND>

Prompts you to enter a WHERE or EXCEPT phrase
and then moves the cursor to the first entry
satisfying the condition. The WHERE or EXCEPT
phrase you enter is displayed in brackets the
next time you enter <FIND>. To move the cursor
to the next entry satisfying the condition,
enter <FIND NEXT> and press the RETURN key.

Moves the cursor to the first column of the next
line entry satisfying the condition last entered
as part of the <FIND> function.

Deletes the entry that the cursor is on.

Brings back the last entry deleted.

Moves the currently displayed line of data left
one column. Can be used to select which part of
a line to display that is too long to be
completely displayed. Remains in effect for the
duration of the command, unless you move the
data left or right again.

the

column

<DISPLAY RIGHT> Moves the currently displayed line of data right
one column. Can be used to select which part of
a line to display that is too long to be
completely displayed. Remains in effect for the
duration of the command, unless you move the
data left or right again.
<CTRL/C>

Exits CHANGE and deletes all changes you made.

<ENTER>

Exits CHANGE and enters all changes you made.

12-24

COMMANDS
CHANGE
Verb and Report

~hanges

The following function keys are active while you use the
command for verbs and reports:

CHANGE

<HELP>

Displays more detailed information
ADE expects as input next.

Rewrites the screen so that you can see the
display
Use DISPLAY after using
clearly.
<HELP>.

Moves the cursor down to the next step or line.

<DOWN>

Moves the cursor down to the next step or line.

<UP>

Moves the cursor back up to the previous step or
line.

<SKIP>

Moves the cursor down to the beginning of the
next section in a report. Used only in changing
report procedures.

<TOP>

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the verb or
report, keeping changes made so far.

Moves the cursor down to the end of the verb
report.

Moves the cursor so that you can put a step
between two existing steps in a verb or a line
between two existing lines in a report.

<RIGHT>

Moves the cursor right to just after the next
verb item or the next line part (after space) in
the line in a report.

<FIND>

Prompts you to enter a character string and then
moves the cursor to the first step or line
containing the string. The character string you
enter is displayed in brackets the next time you
enter <FIND>. To move the cursor to the next
step or line containing this string, enter <FIND
NEXT>.

Moves the cursor to the next step or line
containing the string last entered as part of
the <FIND> function.

12-25

about

what

COMMANDS
CHANGE
You can find the nth step or line containing an
already specified string by combining <FIND
NEXT> with the numbers on the main keyboard.
Press:
1.

The GOLD (PF1) key on the keypad

The number key(s) on the main
indicate "do n times")

The <FIND NEXT> function key on the keypad

keyboard

(to

If the same character string appears more than
once in a step or line, it still counts as one
<FIND> or <FIND NEXT>.
Like most other ADE
functions, <FIND> and <FIND NEXT> work on whole
steps and lines.
<DELETE LINE>

Deletes the step or line that the cursor is on.

Brings back the last step or line deleted.

Exits CHANGE and deletes all changes you made.

<ENTER>

Exits CHANGE and enters all changes you made.

See the following chapters for more information:
•

Function keys - Chapter 3

•

Changing the worksheet - Chapters 5 and 6

•

Changing verbs - Chapter 9

•

Modifying reports - Chapter 10

Examples
CHANGE existing WORKSHEET columns ALL in lines WHERE PN NE P09
CHANGE existing TASK
CHANGE existing QUANTITIES

12-26

COMMANDS
COMBINE
12.9

COMBINE

Purpose
The COMBINE command adds columns to the worksheet by extending
worksheet lines with data from another table. Data is copied
from the table to matching lines in the worksheet.
Formats
column
COMBINE worksheet with table table over column -non-matches to <WORKSHEET>
COMBINE worksheet with table table over column column
non-matches to <WORKSHEET> table
COMBINE worksheet with table table over column column
--non-matches to <WORKSHEET> NOWHERE
where table is a table name
column is a column name
Entering the COMBINE Command
•

Make sure that the worksheet (not the table) has
of columns and lines you want to keep.

•

You must specify a column name that is in both the worksheet
and the table.

•

In the column specified, some values in the table must match
some values in the worksheet.
If no values match, the
worksheet has no lines after COMBINE is finished. All lines
not matched are in the non-matches table specified. NOWHERE
can also be specified for the the non-matches.

•

To combine the worksheet with a table in another area, enter
an optional IN phrase after the table name.

12-27

the

order

COMMANDS
COMBINE
Effects
Command:

COMBINE worksheet with table PART.COST over column PN
non-matches to NOWHERE

QTY

COST

QTY

COST

P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04

128
135
142
92
167
251
48
74
10
65
143
202

P01
P02

. 01
. 03

P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02

128
135
142
92
167
251

. 01
. 01
. 01
. 03
. 03
. 03

PART.COST

Worksheet

New Worksheet

COMBINE creates a new worksheet.

The table is not changed.

For each worksheet line where COMBINE finds a matching data
value in the table, COMBINE extends the worksheet line by adding
the rest of the columns in the table.
•

When the specified column contains duplicate values, COMBINE
creates a line in the new worksheet for every possible
match. The next two examples show the results for duplicate
values in the worksheet and duplicate values in the table.
Command:

COMBINE worksheet with table A over column TWO
non-matches to NOWHERE

ONE

TWO

A
B

1
1
1
2
2

1
2

D
E

Worksheet

THREE

ONE

TWO

A
B

1
1
1
2
2

D
E
Table A

L
L
L

M
M

New Worksheet

Duplicate Values in Worksheet

12-28

THREE

COMMANDS
COMBINE
Command:

COMBINE worksheet with table B over column TWO
non-matches to NOWHERE

1
2

THREE

ONE

L
M

A
B

D
E
Worksheet

1
1
1
2
2

Table B

THREE

ONE

L
L
L
M
M

A
B

D
E

New Worksheet

Duplicate Values in Table
•

You must have different column names in the table and the
worksheet, except for the one common column name required.

•

The order of data in the worksheet determines the
data in the new worksheet.

order

NOTE
COMBINE discards from the worksheet all lines where it
finds no matching data value from the table. COMBINE
puts these lines into the specified non-matches table
and tells you the number of lines that were put there,
unless you specify that the non-matches be thrown away
by specifying NOWHERE for the non-matches or that they
be put in the worksheet by specifying WORKSHEET.

12-29

COMMANDS
COMBINE
Using the COMBINE Command
In ADE, it is best to store data in small related tables
than in large tables with many columns and lines.

rather

This approach can save you time in three ways:
•

You enter less data.

•

You update less data.

•

Because ADE commands work faster on smaller tables
larger tables, you get your work done faster.

than

For information on designing related tables to take advantage of
COMBINE and an example that shows how COMBINE can save time in
data entry and update, see Chapter 8.
For information on suggested size limits
Appendix A.

12-30

for

ADE

tables,

see

COMMANDS
COPY
12.10

COPY

Purpose
The COPY command makes copies of verbs and report procedures.
Formats
COPY procedure procedure to procedure
COPY procedure JOURNAL to

proc~dure

where procedure is a verb or report procedure name
Entering the COPY Command
•

For the first procedure name, enter the name of the verb or
report procedure you want to copy or the keyword JOURNAL if
you want to copy the last ten commands used.

•

For the second procedure name, enter a name for your copy.
You must specify a new name.
COPY will not replace an
existing procedure.

•

To copy a procedure from another ADE user's area, enter
optional IN phrase after the first procedure name.

•

Although you can copy a procedure from another ADE user's
area into your area, you cannot copy a procedure from your
area into another ADE user's area.
This is an
ADE
protection feature.

Effects
•

COPY places a copy of the specified verb or report procedure
in your area and enters its name into your ADE directory.

•

If the name you entered for the copy already exists, the
COPY command stops and displays an error message in the
message area. You do not have to reenter the entire COPY
command but only a procedure name that does not yet exist
for COPY to use.

Examples
COPY procedure VERB1 to VERB2
COPY procedure JOURNAL to NEW.REPORT

12-31

COMMANDS
DIVIDE
12.11

DIVIDE

Purpose
The DIVIDE command divides worksheet columns or values.
Use the DIVIDE command when you want to divide two columns, a
column and a value, or two values. To divide multiple times or
do more complex arithmetic, use the CALCULATE command.
Formats
DIVIDE item item by item result in column <QUO>
DIVIDE item item by item result in column <QUO> column
where item is either a column name or a value
column is a column name
Entering the DIVIDE Command
You can use a WHERE or EXCEPT phrase to divide a subset of
worksheet lines.
When you enter the DIVIDE command, place the
WHERE or EXCEPT phrase after the result column name.
Effects
•

The DIVIDE command places the result in a new or existing
worksheet column. However, when you specify two values and
the worksheet has no lines, the DIVIDE command displays the
result in the scrolling area of the screen.

•

You specify the column names and the values you want to
divide.
You also specify the column name for the result.
When you use a new column name for the result, the column is
added to the worksheet automatically.
When you use an
existing column name for the result, the results of the
division replace the old values in the column.

12-32

COMMANDS

DIVIDE
Examples
•

Dividing two columns
For every line in the worksheet, the DIVIDE command divides
the two column values in the line and places their product
on the same line in the result column.

A B

•

DIVIDE item A by B result in QUO

2
3
4

4
6

QUO
2
2
2
2

Dividing a value by a column
The DIVIDE command divides the value by every value in
column and places each quotient in the result column.
A

1
2

DIVIDE item 12 by A result in QUO

3
4

•

QUO

1
2

3
4

the

Dividing two values
When the worksheet contains one or more lines, the DIVIDE
command divides the two values and places their quotient in
every line of the result column.

1
2

DIVIDE item 4 by 2 result in A

3
4

2
2
2
2

If the worksheet has no lines, DIVIDE displays the result in
the scrolling area of the screen.

12-33

COMMANDS
DIVIDE
Using the DIVIDE Command
Arithmetic Rules
•

After you divide numbers, the
numeric column.

result

column

always

•

Dividing by zero produces "blank" as a result.

•

Nonnumeric characters and blanks have the value zero.

Decimal Places
ADE keeps track of decimal places for numbers in numeric
columns. All values in a numeric column have the same number of
decimal places. However, ADE does not keep track of decimal
places for numbers in character columns.
When you divide numeric columns, the number of decimal places in
the result column has the larger number of decimal places
present in either column or the specified value, or in the
number explicitly stated in a ROUND or TRUNCATE optional phrase.
Roundin$/Truncating
You can round or truncate results of arithmetic commands by
using the optional phrases ROUND # or TRUNCATE # at the end of
the command line, where "#" is the number of decimal places you
want the result to be rounded or truncated to. For example:
DIVIDE item 10 by 2 result in QUO

ROU~Q_ ~

CALCULATE expression A/B result in column CAL TRUNCATE 3

12-34

COMMANDS
ENTER
12. 12

ENTER

Purpose
The ENTER command lets you enter new lines into the worksheet.
Formats
ENTER new lines in worksheet using columns <ALL>
ENTER new lines in worksheet using columns <ALL> columns
where columns is a list of columns

Entering the ENTER Command
•

Before you use the ENTER command, make sure you copy the
table you want to work with into the worksheet with the GET
command.

•

The worksheet must contain at least one column.

Effects
•

ENTER clears the screen, displays the last worksheet line,
and displays the worksheet column names. A question mark
follows each column name. A row of dots appears at the
first column, between the column name and the question mark.
This row of dots and the cursor always appear at the column
awaiting your data.
The following is an example of this column prompting:
NAME • ••••••••• ?
?

BADGE.NUMBER
DATE.HIRED
DEPT

?
?

Enter a value for each column.
Use the DELETE key to
correct typing mistakes.
Press the RETURN key to move to
the next column. Also press the RETURN key to enter a blank
value into a column. The row of dots moves from column to
column as you enter values.

12-35

COMMANDS
ENTER
This is how the screen looks after you enter several values:
NAME
BADGE.NUMBER
DATE.HIRED

? JONES
? 4
? 2-Jan-80

DE PT •••••••••• ?

•

If any columns are restricted to numbers or dates, you must
enter the correct kind of value. If you enter an incorrect
value, the ENTER command:
•

Deletes the incorrect value

•

Displays an error message

•

Moves the cursor back to the beginning of the column
you can reenter the value correctly

When you finish entering values in all the columns, you have
entered one worksheet line.
When the worksheet has no key column, the ENTER
adds the new line to the end of the worksheet.

command

When the worksheet has a key column, the ENTER command
checks the key column value you just entered. If the
value is a new key column value, the command puts the
new line into the worksheet in order by key column
value. If the value already exists in the worksheet's
key column, the command rejects the new line and
displays an error message.
•

When a line of data has been entered, the screen clears and
the column names are redisplayed.
The ENTER command is
ready for the next line of data.

12-36

COMMANDS
ENTER
Function Keys
At any point where ENTER expects input, the active function keys
are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The following
function keys are active while you use the ENTER command:
<HELP>

Displays more detailed information
ADE expects as input next.

Rewrites the screen so
display clearly.

Moves the cursor down to the next column.

<DOWN>

Moves the cursor down to the next column.

<UP>

Moves the cursor back up to the previous column.

<SKIP>

Moves the cursor to the first column of the next
line entry.

<TOP>

Moves the cursor up to the
grouping.

top

Moves the cursor
column grouping.

the

bottom

down

that

you

about
can

what

see

the

column
of

the

Exits CHANGE and deletes all changes you made.

<ENTER>

Exits CHANGE and enters all changes you made.

For more information on ADE function keys, see Chapter 3.
Example
ENTER new lines in worksheet using columns ALL

12-37

COMMANDS
ERASE
12.13

ERASE

Purpose
The ERASE command erases:
•

A table

•

A verb

•

A report

Formats
ERASE existing table
ERASE existing verb
ERASE existing report
where table is a table name
verb is a verb name
repO"rt is a report name
Entering the ERASE Command
•

To erase a table, verb, or report, enter its name.

•

You cannot use the ERASE command to
lines. Use the PICK command instead.

delete

columns

and

Effects
•

When you erase a table, verb, or report, the ERASE
lets you reconfirm the command. For example:

command

Do you want to erase the Table PARTS (YES or NO) ?
Answering YES erases the table.
The
appears at the bottom of the screen:

following

message

The table "PARTS" has been erased.
Answering NO stops the ERASE command.
appears at the bottom of the screen:

The following message

The table "PARTS" is not erased.
•

After you erase a table, a verb or a
You cannot recover it.

12-38

report,

gone.

COMMANDS
ERASE
Using the ERASE Command
When you use the ERASE command in a verb, you probably want the
verb to finish its work automatically. That is, when you run
the verb, you don't want the ERASE command to ask if you want to
erase an entity, then wait for an answer. You can preanswer the
question when you make or change the verb.
When you enter the ERASE command in a verb, you will be prompted
as follows:
Step

1? ERASE existing PERSONNEL
Do you want to erase the item (YES or NO) ?

To accept the default (which is NO), type NO or press the RETURN
key.
To specify YES, type YES. These inputs will be used when
the verb runs. Press the ENTER key to specify that the question
should be asked when the verb runs.
Example
ERASE existing PERSONNEL
Do you want to ERASE the table "PERSONNEL" (YES or NO) ? YES
The table "PERSONNEL" has been erased.

12-39

COMMANDS
EXIT
12.14

EXIT

Purpose
The EXIT command ends an ADE session.
Format
EXIT
Effects
•

After you type EXIT, the following question is displayed
the message area:

Do you really want to end this session (YES or NO) ?
Answering NO stops the EXIT
returns to running ADE.

command

from

completing

and

Answering YES allows the EXIT command to proceed.
•

ADE then checks whether your worksheet has changed since you
entered a GET, SAVE, or MAKE WORKSHEET command. If your
worksheet has not changed, ADE exits. If your worksheet has
changed, you see this question:
Your Worksheet has not been saved, this command will lose
changes you made. Should ADE do command anyway (YES or NO) ?
Answering NO stops the EXIT
returns to running ADE.

command

from

completing

and

Answering YES allows the EXIT command to complete exiting.
•

When ADE exits, you return to the host system environment.

•

The next time you start an ADE
empty.

12-40

session,

the

worksheet

COMMANDS
GET
12.15

GET

Purpose
The GET command copies a table into the worksheet.
Format
GET table table
where table is a table name
Entering the GET Command
•

To get part of a table into the worksheet, enter an optional
WHERE or EXCEPT phrase after the table name.

•

To get a table in another area, enter an optional IN
after the table name.

•

To get a properly formatted file outside of ADE, enter an
optional EXTERNAL phrase after the table name. See Chapter
7 for details.

phrase

Effects
The GET command:
•

Discards your current worksheet

•

Makes a new worksheet by copying the table you name into it

12-41

COMMANDS
GRAPH
12.16

GRAPH

Purpose
The GRAPH command produces a bar graph of the values in
worksheet column in relation to another worksheet column.

one

Format
GRAPH vertical column column versus horizontal column column
where column is a column name
Entering the GRAPH Command
•

The first column you specify must contain numbers.
column will be the vertical axis of the graph.

This

•

The second column you specify can contain any kind of
This column will be the horizontal axis of the graph.

data.

•

You can output the graph to the line printer or to a file as
well as to the terminal. Enter one of the following after
the second column name:
An optional TO PRINTER phrase
An optional TO FILE phrase

•

You can graph a subset of the lines in the worksheet. Enter
an optional WHERE or EXCEPT phrase after the second column
name.

For more information on the optional phrases, see Chapter 7.
Effects
•

A title line is displayed above the bar graph.

•

The bar graph is displayed on the screen by default.

•

When you use an optional TO PRINTER
printed on the line printer.

•

When you use an optional Tb FILE phrase, the graph is copied
to a file or device.

•

The GRAPH command does not change the worksheet.

12-42

phrase,

the

graph

COMMANDS
HELP
12.17

HELP

Purpose
The HELP command displays:
•

Information about ADE subjects

•

Information about a specific ADE topic

•

Information about a specific ADE command

•

All the ADE commands

Formats
HELP me with subject <ADE>
HELP me with subject <ADE> subject
HELP me with subject <ADE> command
HELP me with subject <ADE> ?
where subject is an ADE subject name
command is an ADE .command name
Entering the HELP Command
•

For a list of subjects on which help is available, press the
RETURN key after the <ADE> prompt.

•

For specific ADE information, after the <ADE> prompt enter a
subject or command name like TABLES, VERBS, REPORTS, TOPICS,
MAKE, GET, SAVE and so on.

•

For a list of ADE command names, enter ?
prompt.

after

the

Effects
•

The information you ask for is displayed on the screen.

•

The HELP command does not change the worksheet.

12-43

<ADE>

COMMANDS
LIST
12.18

LIST

Purpose
The LIST command produces a listing of:
•

The worksheet

•

A table

•

The steps in a verb

•

The sections in a report procedure

•

The last ten commands entered

Formats
LIST existing <WORKSHEET> columns <ALL>
LIST existing <WORKSHEET> columns <ALL> columns
LIST existing <WORKSHEET> table columns <ALL> columns
LIST existing <WORKSHEET> verb
LIST existing <WORKSHEET> report
LIST existing <WORKSHEET> JOURNAL
where columns specify the columns to use
table is a table name
verb is a verb name
repQrt is a report name
Entering the LIST Command
•

To use the short form of the LIST command to list all
columns in the worksheet, just press the RETURN key at the
Ade: command prompt.

•

To list all columns in the worksheet
RETURN key after the <ALL> prompt.

12-44

table,

press

the

COMMANDS
LIST
•

To list specific columns in the worksheet or table,
columns with one of the following:

replace

A list of column names, separated by commas
The keyword ALL, which means use all the columns
The keyword OMIT, followed by a list
separated by commas
•

column

names,

To list line numbers of lines in the worksheet or table, use
the keyword LINE with one of the following:
The keyword ALL, which means use all the columns
A list of column names separated by commas

Using the LIST Command
These optional phrases can be used with the LIST command:
Phrase

Where to Type

Effect

WHERE column operator value

After table
name or
WORKSHEET.

Lists lines
that meet
specified
condition.

EXCEPT column operator value

After table
name or
WORKSHEET.

Lists lines
that do
not meet
specified
condition.

TO PRINTER

After any
parameter.

Lists on line
printer.

TO PORT

After any
parameter.

Lists on printer
c-onnected to
terminal.

TO FILE filespec

After any
parameter.

Lists to
file or
device.

TO DEVICE devicename

After any
parameter.

Lists to
device.

IN dev:[directory]

After table,
verb, or report
name.

Lists table,
verb, or report
in other ADE
user directory.

12-45

COMMANDS
LIST
Effects
•

Use the NO SCROLL
display.

key

•

LIST moves forward only. You cannot
after it scrolls off the screen.

•

The LIST command for the worksheet or a table causes any key
column name to be underlined.

•

The LIST command with optional phrases lists the
table, verb, or report procedure you name.

12-46

stop

and

restart
redisplay

the

screen

information

worksheet,

COMMANDS
MAKE
12.19

MAKE

Purpose
The MAKE command makes:
•

A worksheet column

•

A worksheet

•

A verb

•

A report

Formats
MAKE new COLUMN called column
MAKE new COLUMN called column AS CHARACTER
MAKE new COLUMN called column AS NUMBER
MAKE new COLUMN called column AS DATE
MAKE new COLUMN called column AS KEY
MAKE new WORKSHEET called table
MAKE new VERB called verb
MAKE new REPORT called report using table <WORKSHEET>
MAKE new REPORT called report using table <WORKSHEET> table
where column is a column name
table is a table name
verb is a verb name
repQrt is a report
Effects
Making ~ Worksheet Column
The MAKE command adds the new column to the right side of the
worksheet.
The new column contains no data. MAKE adds the new
column to the worksheet only, not to any table previously copied
into the worksheet with the GET command.
See Chapter 6 for more information on making a column.

12-47

COMMANDS
MAKE
Making ~ Worksheet
You use MAKE to name the table and define the columns. You name
the table when you enter the command. After you enter the
command, ADE prompts you for column names.
As in making a
column, you can define a key column by typing AS KEY after the
column name. After the worksheet is made, an implicit ENTER
command is performed to enter data into the new worksheet.
Making a new worksheet discards your old worksheet.
See Chapter 5 for a step-by-step
worksheet and producing a table.

description

making

Making ~ Verb
The MAKE command prompts you to enter the commands, one at a
time, that make up the verb. You enter the commands the same
way, with the same prompts, as you do on the command line. Each
command is a step in the verb. When you finish entering steps,
press the ENTER key to complete the command.
See Chapter 9 for a step-by-step description of making a verb.
Making ~ Report
The MAKE command makes a standard report procedure using
worksheet or a table.
The standard report procedure
COLUMNS, LAYOUT, TOP, BOTTOM, and WHERE sections.
See Chapter 10
report.

for

step-by-step

12-48

description

making

the
has
a

COMMANDS
MERGE
12.20

MERGE

Purpose
The MERGE command performs one of two functions:
•

Inserts lines from a table into the worksheet
ordered column value

order

•

Appends lines from a table to the bottom of the worksheet

Formats
MERGE worksheet with table table over column <NONE> column
duplicates to <NOWHERE> table
MERGE worksheet with table table over column <NONE>
duplicates to <NOWHERE>
where table is a table name
column is a column name
Entering the MERGE Command
•

To insert lines from the table into the worksheet, you must
specify a column that is ordered in both the worksheet and
the table.

•

To append lines from the table to the bottom of the
worksheet, press the RETURN key after <NONE>. Use this form
of the MERGE command for tables without an ordered column
and use SORT to reorder the data in the worksheet after
MERGE is finished. See also the APPEND command.

For both kinds of MERGE, the names and types of the
• worksheet
columns must match the names and types of the
columns in the table, although
more columns than the table.

12-49

the

worksheet

may

contain

COMMANDS
MERGE
Effects
Inserting Worksheet Lines Into a Table
Command:

MERGE worksheet with table PERSONNEL over column BADGE
duplicates to NOWHERE

BADGE

NAME

DEPT

BADGE

NAME

DEPT

BADGE

2
4

SMITH
BAKER
EATON

SALES
SALES
SALES

ADAMS
MOORE
JONES

MFG
MFG
MFG

1
2

3
4

5
6

Worksheet

PERSONNEL

NAME

DEPT

ADAMS
SMITH
MOORE
BAKER
JONES
EATON

MFG
SALES
MFG
SALES
MFG
SALES

New Worksheet

Appending Worksheet Lines Into A Table
Command:

BADGE
2

4
6

MERGE worksheet with table PERSONNEL over column NONE
duplicates to NOWHERE

NAME

DEPT

BADGE

NAME

DEPT

BADGE

SMITH
BAKER
EATON

SALES
SALES
SALES

1
3
5

ADAMS
MOORE
JONES

MFG
MFG
MFG

4
6

2
1

3
5

Worksheet
•

PERSONNEL

NAME

DEPT

SMITH
BAKER
EATON
ADAMS
MOORE
JONES

SALES
SALES
SALES
MFG
MFG
MFG

New Worksheet

When you specify an over column, MERGE inserts lines from
the table into the worksheet in order by ordered over column
value. MERGE can also optionally use a specified table to
contain any duplicates.
If you specify WORKSHEET, the
duplicates are entered into the worksheet anyway.
MERGE inserts into the worksheet those lines in the
table where over column values differ from over column
values in the worksheet.

12-50

COMMANDS
MERGE
MERGE copies into the duplicates table all lines in the
table being merged where over column values match over
column values in the worksheet.
If you have named a duplicates table, any duplicates
found are preserved in it for later inspection and
potential use.
•

When you do not specify an over column in the command, MERGE
appends all the lines from the table to the bottom of the
worksheet. You can do this more simply with the APPEND
command.

Using the MERGE Command
Like COMBINE, MERGE lets you keep information in small separate
tables that you merge when necessary. You can often-get your
work done faster when you use this approach.

12-51

COMMANDS
MOVE
12.21

MOVE

Purpose
The MOVE command performs one of two functions:
•

Places a single data
worksheet column

value

one

•

Copies one or more of the data values
column into another worksheet column

more
from

lines
one

worksheet

Formats
MOVE from value to column column
MOVE from LINE to column column
MOVE from TODAY to column column
MOVE from column to column column
where value is a numeric, date, or character value
column is a column name
Entering the MOVE Command
•

To place a data value in every line of a worksheet column:
Replace value with a data value. You can specify any
kind of value (character, number, or date), but the
value cannot contain spaces unless they are surrounded
with matching quotation marks.
Use the keyword LINE to specify
line number.
Use the keyword TODAY
date.

specify

Replace column with the name of
column or a new column.
•

the

current
the

worksheet

current

existing

system

worksheet

To copy all the data from one worksheet column into another
worksheet column, replace column with column names in both
places in the command format. You can copy data only from
an existing column into an existing worksheet column or a
new column, but the columns you specify should
have
different names.

12-52

COMMANDS
MOVE
•

To move part of the data in either of the cases above, enter
an optional WHERE or EXCEPT phrase after the destination
column name.

Effects
Moving ~ Value
•

When you use an existing column, the MOVE command
the old data in the column with the new value.

replaces

•

When you use a new column, the MOVE command makes the new
column in the worksheet and transfers the value into each
line in the new column. The column type matches the type of
the value.

Moving ~ Column
•

When you use an existing column, the MOVE command
the old data in the column with the new data.

replaces

•

When you use a new column, the MOVE command makes the new
column in the worksheet and transfers the data into the new
column.

•

Whether you copy data into an existing column or a new
column, the column receiving the data becomes the same type
of column as the column being copied.

•

After the MOVE command is finished, both columns are still
in the worksheet. They are both the same type of column and
contain the same data. Only the column names differ.

Using the MOVE Command
If you try to move a character string that is an exact match of
a column name in your worksheet, the MOVE command moves the data
from the worksheet column instead of moving the character
string.
To avoid this problem, enclose the character string in
quotation marks.

12-53

matching

COMMANDS
MULTIPLY
12.22

MULTIPLY

Purpose
The MULTIPLY command multiplies worksheet columns or values.
Use the MULTIPLY command when you want to multiply two columns,
a column and a value, or two values. To multiply more than two
columns or do more complex arithmetic, use the CALCULATE
command.
Formats
MULTIPLY item item by item result in column <PRO>
MULTIPLY item item by item result in column <PRO> column
where item is either a column name or a value
COIUmn is a column name
Entering the MULTIPLY Command
You can use a WHERE or EXCEPT phrase to multiply a subset of
worksheet lines. When you enter the MULTIPLY command, place the
WHERE or EXCEPT phrase after the result column name.
Effects
•

The MULTIPLY command places the result in a new or
worksheet column.
However, when you use two values and the
lines, the MULTIPLY command displays
scrolling area of the screen.

•

existing

worksheet has no
the result in the

You specify the column names and the values to multiply.
You also specify the column name for the result. When you
use a new column name for the result, the column is added to
the worksheet automatically.
When you use an existing
column name for the result, the old values in the column are
replaced by the results of the multiplication.

12-54

COMMANDS
MULTIPLY
Examples
•

Multiplying two columns
For every line in the worksheet, the MULTIPLY command
multiplies the two column values in the line and places
their product on the same line in the result column.
A B

A B
1

2
3
4

•

4
6
8

MULTIPLY item A by B result in PRO

PRO

Multiplying a value by a column
The MULTIPLY command multiplies the value by every value
the column and places each product in the result column.

A
1
2

MULTIPLY item 2 by A result in PRO

PRO

1
2

•

4
6
8

Multiplying two values
When the worksheet contains one or more lines, the MULTIPLY
command multiplies the two values and places their product
in every line of the result column.

A
1

MULTIPLY item 1 by 2 result in A

3
4

2
2
2
2

If the worksheet has no lines, MULTIPLY displays the
in the scrolling area of the screen.

12-55

result

COMMANDS
MULTIPLY
Using the MULTIPLY Command
Arithmetic Rules
•

When you multiply numbers, the result
numeric column.

column

always

•

Nonnumeric characters and blanks have the value zero.

Decimal Places
ADE keeps track of decimal places for numbers in numeric
columns. All values in a numeric column have the same number of
decimal places. However, ADE does not keep track of decimal
places for numbers in character columns.
When you multiply numeric columns, the number of decimal places
in the result column has the larger number of decimal places
present in either column or a specified value, or the number
explicitly stated in a ROUND or TRUNCATE optional phrase.
Rounding/Truncating
You can round or truncate results of arithmetic commands by
using the optional phrases ROUND # or TRUNCATE # at the end of
the command line, where "#" is the number of decimal places you
want the result to be rounded or truncated to. For example:
MULTIPLY item 1 by 2 result in PRO ROUND 2
CALCULATE expression A*B result in column CAL TRUNCATE 3

12-56

COMMANDS
NAMES
12.23

NAMES

Purpose
The NAMES command lists information about:

• Tables
• Verbs
•

Reports

Formats
NAMES of <ALL>
NAMES of <ALL> TABLES
NAMES of <ALL> VERBS
NAMES of <ALL> REPORTS
Entering the NAMES Command
•

You can send NAMES information to the line printer or to a
file as well as to the terminal. Enter one of the following
optional phrases at the end of the other command input:
TO PRINTER
TO PORT
TO FILE filename
TO FILE dev:filename
TO DEVICE devicename:

•

For NAMES information on all tables, verbs, and reports in
another ADE user area, enter ALL and an optional IN phrase
after the <ALL> prompt.

•

For NAMES information on either tables, verbs, or reports in
another area, enter an optional IN phrase after the keyword
TABLES, VERBS, or REPORTS.
For more information on optional phrases, see Chapter 7.

12-57

COMMANDS
NAMES
Effects
•

this

lists

When you specify ALL, the NAMES command
information about tables, verbs, and reports:
Name
Description
Date and time last saved
Access category

•

The NAMES command displays
default.

information

the

screen

•

When you include an optional TO PRINTER phrase in the
command, the information is sent to the line printer.
listing files are automatically deleted from storage
printing.

•

When you include an optional TO PORT phrase in the NAMES
command and your terminal has a printer attached to it, the
information is sent to the attached printer.

•

When you enter an optional TO FILE with file specification,
the NAMES command copies information into a system file.

NAMES
These
after

you enter an optional
TO
DEVICE
with
device
• When
specification, the NAMES command copies information to the
system device.

12-58

COMMANDS
OUTLINE
12.24

OUTLINE

Purpose
The OUTLINE command displays column and line
the worksheet or a table.

information

about

Formats
OUTLINE of table <WORKSHEET>
OUTLINE of table <WORKSHEET> table
where table is a table name
Effects
•

You can use an optional TO
outline to the line printer.

PRINTER

phrase

send

•

You can use an optional TO FILE phrase to send
to a file or device.

•

You can use an optional IN phrase to list the outline
table in another area.

the

outline

For more information on the use of the OUTLINE command,
Chapter 6.

12-59

the

a
see

COMMANDS
PICK
12. 25

PICK

Purpose
The PICK command keeps
worksheet and discards
the worksheet.

specific lines and columns in the
the rest of the lines and columns from

Formats
PICK columns <ALL> and lines <ALL>
PICK columns <ALL> columns and lines <ALL> where-excep~ phrase
where columns specify the columns to use
Wfiere=except phrase is a valid WHERE or EXCEPT phrase
Entering the PICK Command
Use one PICK command to select both the columns
you want to keep in the worksheet.

and

the

lines

RETURN

key

after

Picking Columns
PICK columns <ALL> columns ...
•

To keep all worksheet columns, press the
<ALL>.

•

To keep specific worksheet columns, replace
of the following:

colu~~~

with one

The list of column names you want to keep, separated
commas

The keyword OMIT, followed by the column names you
to discard, separated by commas

want

Picking Lines
... and lines <ALL> where-except phrase
•

To keep all worksheet lines,
<ALL>.

the

RETURN

key

after

•

To keep specific worksheet lines, enter a
phrase after <ALL>.

WHERE

EXCEPT

12-60

press

COMMANDS
PICK
Effects
•

After you enter the command, PICK works in two separate
steps. First it keeps the lines that meet the condition you
entered. Then it keeps the columns you specified.

•

When the PICK command is finished, the worksheet contains
the lines that meet the condition you specified and the
columns you specified.

Using the PICK Command
Use PICK to reorder columns in the worksheet. For columns, list
the column names from left to right as you want them to-8ppear.
Put commas between the column names.
Use PICK to get rid of a column or columns from the worksheet.
Specify either which columns to keep or which ones not to keep.

12-61

COMMANDS
REMARK
12.26

REMARK

Purpose
The REMARK command enters a remark (a line of descriptive
into a verb.

text)

Format
REMARK message message
where message is text to be entered
Entering the REMARK Command
•

You enter remarks with MAKE or CHANGE the same way you enter
other verb steps.

•

To enter a remark, type REMARK and press the RETURN key.
After the prompt for message, type the remark text. The
remark can be only one line long.

•

To enter another remark or continue a
line, enter another REMARK command.

remark

second

Effects
•

Remarks are displayed when you run the verb, when you change
the verb, and when you use the LIST command to display or
print the steps in the verb.

•

Remarks do not change the way a verb works.
For more information on remarks, see Chapter 9.

12-62

COMMANDS
RENAME
12. 27

RENAME

Purpose
The RENAME command changes the name of:

• A table
• A verb
• A report
• A column
• A worksheet
Formats
RENAME Command:
RENAME existing table to table table
RENAME existing verb to verb verb
RENAME existing report to report report
RENAME existing column to column column
RENAME existing column to column column AS CHARACTER
RENAME existing column to column column AS NUMERIC
RENAME existing column to column column AS DATE
--RENAME existing column to column column AS KEY
RENAME existing column to column column AS NO KEY
RENAME existing column to column column AS NONKEY
RENAME existing WORKSHEET to newname
where table is a table name
verb is a verb name
report is a report name
column is a column name

12-63

COMMANDS
RENAME
Entering the RENAME Command
•

When you use RENAME to change the type of a column, use
same column name but enter the new type.

the

To change a column's type, the column must contain the
• correct
kind of target type data. For example, date columns
must contain dates.
•

To change a column from nonkey to key, the column values
must be in ascending order and the column cannot contain
duplicate values.

Effects
After you rename an item, all ADE commands recognize the new
name.
However, verbs and reports still contain uses of the old
name. Use the CHANGE command to change the old names in verbs
and reports.
Using the RENAME Command
The RENAME command changes the name of a worksheet or worksheet
column. To save the renamed column or worksheet in a table:
•

Use GET to copy the table into the worksheet.

•

Use RENAME to rename the worksheet or worksheet column.

•

Use SAVE to save the new worksheet or column name.

12-64

COMMANDS
SAVE
12. 28

SA VE

Purpose
The SAVE command saves a copy of the worksheet as a table.
Format
SAVE worksheet as <worksheet name> table
where worksheet name is the worksheet name
table is a table name
Entering the SAVE Command
•

You can specify a new table name or an existing
in your area.

table

name

•

You can save a part of the worksheet in a table.
Enter
optional WHERE or EXCEPT phrase after the table name.

•

You can save the worksheet as a defined file outside of ADE.
Enter an optional EXTERNAL phrase after the table name. See
Chapter 7 for details.

Effects
•

When you specify a new table name, SAVE saves a copy of
worksheet with that name.

•

When you specify an existing table name, you have
to stop the command. SAVE asks a question like:

the

chance

Do you want to replace the Table "SIX" with the WORKSHEET
(YES or NO) ?
Answering YES replaces the table with a copy of the
worksheet.
The following message is then displayed in
the message area:
The WORKSHEET has been saved as Table "SIX".
The old table data is now gone and you cannot recall it.
Answering NO stops the command. The
is displayed in the message area:
The Table SIX is not changed.

12-65

following

message

COMMANDS
SAVE
•

After you save the worksheet as a table, you still have the
worksheet.
SAVE copies the worksheet and saves the copy as
a table.

Using the SAVE Command
When you use the SAVE command in a verb:
•

You must specify a table name.

•

You probably want the verb to finish its work automatically.
That is, when you run the verb, you don't want the SAVE
command to ask if you want to replace the table with the
worksheet, then wait for an answer. When entering the SAVE
command in a verb, you are asked:
Step

3? SAVE worksheet as SIX

Do you want to replace the Table with WORKSHEET
(YES or NO) ?

To store an answer to use when the verb runs, enter YES or
NO.
To have the verb ask for an answer when it runs, press
the ENTER key. To have the verb take the default when it
runs, press the RETURN key.

12-66

COMMANDS
SET
12. 29

SET

Purpose
called

The SET command changes a group of ADE parameters
options. These options control ADE terminal displays.
Formats
SET option <ALL>
SET option <ALL> option
SET option <ALL> option value
Entering the SET Command
•

There are two ways to work with the SET command:
1.

You can display all the options on the screen and then
move through the display with function keys, changing
whichever options you want.

You can also change one option at a time by
complete SET command on the command line.

entering

•

To display all your options and their default values, press
the RETURN key after <ALL> on the command line. You can
also type a specific option name after <ALL> on the command
line and then press the RETURN key. This also displays all
the options and their default values and moves the cursor to
the option you named.

•

To set a specific option, type its name after <ALL> on the
command line. Then type a space, type the new value for the
option and press the RETURN key.

following table shows each option, its name, its
• The
abbreviation, and its default value.
You can use the
abbreviation when you enter the option name on
line.

the

OPTION

NAME

ABBREV

DEFAULT

Date display
Negative number display
Trace display
Verb display
Terminal type
Width of terminal

DATE
NEGATIVE
TRACE
VERB
TERMINAL
WIDTH

DAT
NEG
TRA
VER
TER
WID

< 2-Jan-80 >
< -9000 >
< OFF >

12-67

command

< ON >

< VT100 >
< 80 >

COMMANDS
SET
Detailed Description of Each Option
This section lists the values you can specify
and describes its effect.

for

each

option

Date display - < 2-Jan-80 >
To change the default date display, type DATE after <ALL> on the
command line or move the cursor to the Date display option.
Then type the date January 2, 1980 in the format you want all
dates in date columns to be displayed.
The date format
determines how dates in date columns and default reports are
displayed.
Dates in character columns are always displayed
exactly as you enter them. A date format has three parts: day,
month, and year.
The rules for specifying date formats are
given in Chapter 10.
Negative number display - < -9000 >
To change the default negative number display, type NEGATIVE
after <ALL> on the command line or move the cursor to the
Negative number display option. Then type the number -9000 in
the format you want all numbers in numeric columns to be
displayed; that is, replace -9000 with one of the other
formats: 9000-, (9000), or 9000CR. This option affects numeric
columns only.
Trace display - < OFF >
ON

ADE displays intermediate results while commands
are working. This option is primarily for use by
those who want to shop the system to others. For
example, the GET command displays each line of a
table as it copies the table into the worksheet.

OFF

ADE does not display intermediate
commands are working.

results

while

Verb display - < ON >
ON

ADE displays each step in a verb as it runs. The
output of each command in the verb is displayed
on the screen.

OFF

ADE does not display verb steps when verbs are
run.
However, an error message is displayed if
an error occurs during a step.
In addition, a
message is displayed when the verb is finished
running.
12-68

COMMANDS
SET
Terminal type - < VT100 >
The type of terminal can be VT100, VT52, and ?. The default is
what the host system terminal information reflects. This is
controlled by the system startup files.
Width of terminal -

< 80 >

The VT100 terminal can display either 80 or 132 characters on
each line of the screen. The default width is 80. Replace 80
with 132 to change the terminal width to 132 columns.
The
terminal stays in 132-column mode until you exit ADE.
Working with the Screen Display
To change an option:
•

Move the cursor to the option to be changed.

•

Type the new value after the brackets.

•

Press the RETURN key to enter the new value.

When you finish setting options, press the ENTER
settings.

~ey

to save the

Function Keys
The active function keys are displayed in the message
during the SET command and can be referenced there.

area

Effects
•

The options you specify take
command is finished.

•

All options are in effect until you use another SET
or until you end the ADE session.

•

Options that you set are not saved from session to session.
The next time you start ADE, all the defaults are in effect.

12-69

effect

soon

the

SET

command

COMMANDS
SORT
12.30

SORT

Purpose
The SORT command arranges all worksheet lines in ascending or
descending order based on the values in one or more worksheet
columns.
Formats
SORT by columns columns
SORT by columns columns DESCENDING
where columns specify the columns to be used
Entering the SORT Command
•

When you sort by several columns, you must enter the list of
column names in the order you want to get the results you
want. For example, if you want the values in column B
sorted for each value in column A, enter the column list
A,B.

•

Unless you add the keyword DESCENDING after the column list
in the SORT command, the sorting is in ascending order.

Effects
•

The SORT command moves entire lines of data,
data in the columns you specify.

•

The next three examples show how SORT orders characters,
numbers, and combinations of characters and numbers.
Before SORT

After SORT

23
5
44

5
23
44

BARKER
CARVER
BAKER

BAKER
BARKER
CARVER

5
BAKER
CARVER

23
BARKER

44
5
BAKER
BARKER
CARVER

12-70

not

just

the

COMMANDS
SORT
Using the SORT Command
The following examples show how SORT works for one column and
for several columns.
These examples use the table INVENTORY,
which lists the quantities of four kinds of parts in three
warehouses. The lines are unsorted to begin with.
Usin~

one SORT command to sort one column

Start with the following data:
PN

WHOUSE QTY

P02
P03
P03
P04
P03
P02
p 01
p 01
P04
P02
P01
P04

W3
W3
W1
W1
W2
W1
w1
w3
W2
W2
W2
W3

251
10
48
65
74
92
128
142
143
16.7
135
202

Use SORT to reorder the lines by part number
following commands:

only.

SORT by columns PN
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL
The worksheet lines are in the following order:
PN

WHOUSE QTY

P01
P01
P01
P02
P 02
P02
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04

W1
W3
W2
W1
W2
W3
W1
W3
W2
W2
W1
W3

128
142
135
92
167
251
48
10
74
143
65
202

12-71

Enter

the

COMMANDS
SORT
Using one SORT command to sort several

column~

Start with the unsorted data you used for the previous example.
Use SORT to reorder the lines by both part number and warehouse
number. You can enter the columns PN,WHOUSE or WHOUSE,PN.
The
next two examples show the result for each column order.
First enter the commands:
SORT by columns PN,WHOUSE
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL
The worksheet lines are now in the following order:
PN

WHOUSE QTY

P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P03
P03
P03
P04
P04
P04

W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3

128
135
142
92
167
251
48
74
10
65
143
202

Note that:
•

The lines are in order by both
number

•

The warehouses are in order for each kind of part

12-72

part

number

and

warehouse

COMMANDS
SORT
You get a different result when you enter the columns WHOUSE,PN.
Start again with the
commands:

unsorted

data

and

enter

the

following

SORT by columns WHOUSE,PN
LIST existing WORKSHEET columns ALL
The worksheet lines are in the following order:
PN

WHOUSE QTY

P01
P02
P03
P04
P01
P02
P03
P04
P01
P02
P03
P04

W1
W1
W1
W1
W2
W2
W2
W2
W3
W3
W3
W3

128
92
48
65
135
167
74
143
142
251
10
202

While the lines are still in
warehouse number, now the
warehouse.

order by both part number and
part numbers are in order for each

12-73

COMMANDS
SUBTRACT
12. 31

SUBTRACT

Purpose
The SUBTRACT command subtracts worksheet columns or values.
Use the SUBTRACT command when you want to subtract two columns,
a column and a value, or two values. To subtract more than two
columns or do more complex arithmetic, use the CALCULATE
command.
Formats
SUBTRACT item item from item result in column <DIF>
SUBTRACT item item from item result in column <DIF> column·
where item is either a column name or a value
column is a column name
Entering the SUBTRACT Command
You can use a WHERE or EXCEPT phrase to subtract a subset of
worksheet lines. When you enter the SUBTRACT command, place the
WHERE or EXCEPT phrase after the result column name.
Effects
•

The SUBTRACT command places the result in a new or
worksheet column.

existing

However, when you specify two values and the worksheet has
no lines, the SUBTRACT command displays the result in the
scrolling area of the screen.
•

You specify the column names and the values to subtract.
You also specify the column name for the result. When you
use a new column name for the result, the column is added to
the worksheet automatically.
When you use an existing
column name for the result, the old values in the column are
replaced by the results of the subtraction.

12-74

COMMANDS
SUBTRACT
Examples
•

Subtracting two columns
For every line in the worksheet, the SUBTRACT command
subtracts the two column values in the line and places their
difference on the same line in the result column.

A B

•

1
2

2
4

3
4

6
8

SUBTRACT i tern A from B result in DIF

DIF
1
2

3
4

Subtracting a value from a column
The SUBTRACT command subtracts the value from every value in
the column and places each difference in the result column.
A DIF

SUBTRACT item 1 from A result in DIF

3
4

•

0
1

Subtracting two values
When the worksheet contains one or more lines, the SUBTRACT
command subtracts the two values and places their difference
in every line of the result column.
A

A
1
2

SUBTRACT item 1 from 2 result in A

3
4

1
1
1
1

If the worksheet has no lines, SUBTRACT displays the
in the scrolling area of the screen.

12-75

result

COMMANDS
SUBTRACT
Using the SUBTRACT Command
Arithmetic Rules
•

After you subtract numbers, the result column
numeric column.

always

•

After you subtract two dates, the result column is always
numeric column.

•

After you subtract a number from a date, the
is always a date column.

•

To subtract column values or a value from a column of dates,
the dates must be in a date column.

•

Nonnumeric characters and blanks have the value zero.

•

Subtracting from a blank date results in a blank date.

result

column

Decimal Places
ADE keeps track of decimal places for numbers in numeric
columns. All values in a numeric column have the same number of
decimal places. However, ADE does not keep track of decimal
places for numbers in character columns.
When you subtract numeric columns, the number of decimal places
in the result column has the larger number of decimal places
present in either column or a specified value, or the number
explicitly stated in a ROUND or TRUNCATE optional phrase.
Rounding/Truncating
You can round or truncate results of arithmetic commands by
using the optional phrases ROUND # or TRUNCATE # at the end of
the command line, where "#" is the number of decimal places you
want the result to be rounded or truncated to. For example:
SUBTRACT item 10 from 20 result in DIF ROUND 2
CALCULATE expression A - B result in column CAL TRUNCATE 1

12-76

COMMANDS
TALLY
12. 32

TALLY

Purpose
The TALLY command
column.

produces

running

total

worksheet

Formats
TALLY on column column starting at <O> result in
column <TAL>
TALLY on column column starting at <O> number result in
column <TAL> column
where column is a column name
number is a number value
Effects
TALLY on column A starting at 0 result in column TAL
A

1
2
3

1 + 0 =
2 + 1 =
3 + 3 =
4 + 6 =
5

4
5

Worksheet
at start

TAL

1
3

1
2
3

1
3

4
5

10
15
TALLY
finished

TALLY
working

•

You specify the column to tally, the starting value, and the
column for the result. When you specify <TAL> or another
new column for the result, the TALLY command makes the new
column in the worksheet.
When you specify an existing
column for the result, the TALLY commmand replaces the old
data values in the column with the running total in the
column.

•

The TALLY command works the following way:
1.

It adds the starting value you use to the first value in
the column you are tallying and places the sum on the
first line of the result column.

12-77

COMMANDS
TALLY
2.

It adds the sum from the first line of the result column
to the second value in the column you are tallying and
places this new sum on the second line of the result
column.

This process is repeated until there are no more
to tally.

values

•

After the TALLY command is finished, the result column
contains the running total.
The last line of the result
column contains the total of all the values in the column
you tallied.

•

Characters and blanks have the value of zero.

•

You cannot tally on dates.

12-78

COMMANDS
TOTAL
12.33

TOTAL

Purpose
The TOTAL command produces subtotals
columns.

and

totals

worksheet

Formats
TOTAL on columns columns subtotal by <NONE>
TOTAL on columns columns subtotal by <NONE> columns
where columns specify the columns to be used
Entering the TOTAL Command
•

You can specify columns as:
o

A list of column names, separated by commas

The keyword ALL, which means use all the columns

The keyword OMIT, followed by a list
separated by commas

column

names,

•

For column totals only, list the columns you want totals for
and press the RETURN key after the <NONE> prompt.

•

For both subtotals and column totals,
both command inputs.

specify

columns

The TOTAL command works differently on the columns to
and the columns to subtotal.

for
total

The subtotal columns are not used for any calculations.
Instead, TOTAL uses the data in these columns to determine
where to insert break lines and where to put totals.
The
subtotal columns can contain any kind of data. The columns
you want to total must contain numbers. In addition, make
sure you sort the data first.

12-79

COMMANDS
TOTAL
Effects
Total Only
Command:

TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by NONE

WHOUSE

QTY

WHOUSE

QTY

TOTAL*

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2
W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35
40
52
100
67

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2
W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35
40
52
100
67
451

TOTAL

Command:

--->

TOTAL on columns QTY, VALUE subtotal by NONE

WHOUSE

QTY

VALUE

WHOUSE

QTY

VALUE

TOTAL*

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2
W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35
40
52
100
67

. 50
. 78
. 29
. 35
1. 20
1. 56
3. 00
2. 01

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2
W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35
40
52
100
67
451

. 50
. 78
. 29
. 35
1. 20
1. 56
3. 00
2. 01
9.69

TOTAL

--->

The command:
Places the totals for the specified columns on a new line at
• the
bottom of the worksheet.
Adds a new column named TOTAL* to the right side of the
• worksheet
and places the word TOTAL on the same line as the
totals.

12-80

COMMANDS
TOTAL
Subtotal By One Column
Command:

TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN

WHOUSE

QTY

WHOUSE

QTY

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2
W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35
40
52
100
67

P01
P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35
192
40
52
100
67
259
451

•

--->

W1
W1
W2
W2

TOTAL*

PN
TOTAL

The command inserts a new line (a break) in the worksheet
wherever a value changes in the columns you subtotal by. It
places the following data on each new line:
In each column you total, it
each break.

places

the

In each column you subtotal by, it places
column value at each break.

subtotals
the

subtotal

•

For all columns specified, the command places column
on a new line at the bottom of the worksheet.

•

Finally, the command adds a new column named TOTAL* to the
right side of the worksheet. It places the following data
in this new column:
On the same lines as the subtotals,
columns you are subtotaling by

the

names

totals

On the same line as the column totals, the word TOTAL

12-81

the

COMMANDS
TOTAL
Subtotal By More Than One Column
Command:

TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN, WHOUSE

WHOUSE

QTY

WHOUSE

QTY

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2
W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35
40
52
100
67

P01
P01
P01
P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W1
W2
W2
W2

50
78
128
29
35
64
192
40
52
92
100
67
167
259
451

--->

W1
W1
W1
W2
W2
W2

TOTAL*

WHOUSE
WHOUSE
PN
WHOUSE
WHOUSE
PN
TOTAL

When you subtotal by several columns, the TOTAL command works
basically the same way as it does when you subtotal by one
column. As in sorting or breaking more than one column,
however, the order in which you specify columns to subtotal by
determines the result. In this example:
•

A break occurs each time the part number changes.
are produced at each break.

Subtotals

•

For each part number, a break occurs each time the warehouse
changes. Subtotals are produced at each break.

•

Finally, a column total is produced.

•

The new worksheet contains:
Four subtotals by warehouse inside two subtotals by part
number
A column total

Using The TOTAL Command:
In addition to producing subtotals
helps you produce reports.

12-82

and

column

totals,

TOTAL

COMMANDS
TOTAL
The new subtotal and total lines that TOTAL inserts in the work
sheet can be specified with conditions. Look at the following
data:
Command:

TOTAL on columns QTY subtotal by PN

WHOUSE

QTY

WHOUSE

QTY

P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2
W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35
40
52
100
67

P01
P01
P01
P01
P01
P02
P02
P02
P02
P02

W1
W1
W2
W2

50
78
29
35
192
40
52
100
67
259
451

--->

W1
W1
W2
W2

After TOTAL is finished, you can specify
lines with the following WHERE phrases:
e

Subtotal lines:

Total line:

•

Both subtotal and total lines:

TOTAL*

PN
TOTAL
subtotal

and

total

WHERE TOTAL* EQ PN

WHERE TOTAL* EQ TOTAL

WHERE TOTAL* NE 0 or WHERE TOTAL* NE <RETURN>
Because you can specify these lines, you can rearrange your data
for reports.
You can produce simple reports with ADE commands
or more complex reports by making a report procedure.
For
example, you can:
•

Use TOTAL to produce subtotals and column totals.
LIST TO PRINTER or a report to print the results.

•

Produce a summary report.
After producing subtotals and
column totals with TOTAL, use PICK to retain the lines that
contain subtotals and column totals.
Then use LIST TO
PRINTER or a report to print the results.

For more information,
Chapter 6.

see

the

12-83

BREAK

command

Then

discussion

use

and

COMMANDS
TRAIN
12.34

TRAIN

Purpose
The TRAIN command starts ADE's an online tutorial, which teaches
the basics of ADE to new users.
Format
TRAIN
Effects
•

When you enter the TRAIN command, ADE displays a "Welcome to
ADE Basic User Training" screen with instructions on which
keys to press to continue the training session.

•

The tutorial is completely self-explanatory and interactive.
You follow the instructions on your terminal screen.

•

Your system manager may decide not to provide the training
feature on your system. In that case, the following message
is displayed when you enter the TRAIN command:
ADE TRAINING isn't available on this system.

•

The TRAIN command works only on VT100 series and VT52
terminals. If you enter the TRAIN command on any other type
of terminal, the following message is displayed:
ADE TRAINING isn't available for this kind of terminal.
It only works on VT100 series and VT52 terminals.

12-84

COMMANDS
UPDATE
12.35

UPDATE

Purpose
The UPDATE command copies a table, replaces data in the copy
with data from the worksheet, and places the updated copy back
in the worksheet. UPDATE does not change the table.
Formats
UPDATE table table over column column non-matches
to <NOWHERE>
UPDATE table table over column column non-matches
to <NOWHERE> table
where table is a table name
column is a column name
Entering the UPDATE Command
•

The worksheet does not have to contain all the columns in
the table, but all the worksheet columns must also be in the
table. The column name and type of each worksheet column
must match the column name and type in the table.

•

The column you specify in the command must be an ordered
column, but need not be the key column in both the worksheet
and the table.

Effects
Command:

UPDATE table PERSONNEL over column BADGE non-matches
to EXTRAS

BADGE

PAY

BADGE

16
24
70
105

y
y
y
y

16
24

xxx xxx xxx xxx

x
x
x

70
Worksheet

PERSONNEL
Before UPDATE

12-85

PAY

COMMANDS
UPDATE
BADGE

PAY

105

BADGE

XXX

PAY
y

16
24

Worksheet

EXTRAS

After UPDATE
The UPDATE command copies the table and then uses the data in
the common column to determine which lines in the copy to
change.
•

For lines where an over column value in the worksheet
matches an over column value in the copy, the other values
in the work sheet line replace corresponding values in the
copy.

•

UPDATE places the updated copy of the table
worksheet. The original table is not changed.

•

Like the COMBINE command, the UPDATE command can use a table
specified for non-matches.
This table contains all the
columns that were in the worksheet before you entered the
UPDATE
command.
UPDATE copies into this table those
worksheet lines where over column values do not match over
column values in the table. If all the over column values
match in the table and the worksheet, this table contains
column names but no lines after UPDATE is completed.

•

You can use this non-matches table the same way you use
table.

the

any

Using the UPDATE Command
Although UPDATE and CHANGE both change data values, it is better
to use UPDATE than CHANGE for some tasks. For example, UPDATE
can be faster than CHANGE when there is no condition that
identifies the lines you want to change or when you need to
change only a small number of values in a large table.

12-86

COMMANDS
UPDATE
Example
Your company has 300 employees. You keep each employee's name,
badge number, address, and pay in a table called PERSONNEL. You
keep the data ordered by badge number. The data in PERSONNEL
changes often. For example, when an employee moves or receives
a pay increase, PERSONNEL must be updated.
This month, five employees receive pay increases. There are two
ways to update PERSONNEL. You can use CHANGE, but there are two
disadvantages:
1.

Because you cannot specify all five employees with one WHERE
phrase condition, you must enter more than one (up to five)
CHANGE commands.

Because PERSONNEL has 300 lines of data, CHANGE may be slow.

You can do the job faster with UPDATE:
•

First produce a new worksheet that consists of:
Your new data
One column of data that matches
PERSONNEL

column

data

For this example:
Use MAKE to make a new worksheet with two columns, BADGE
and PAY.
Use ENTER to enter the badge number and new pay for each
employee who received a pay increase.
•

Use UPDATE
command:

update

PERSONNEL.

Enter

the

following

UPDATE table PERSONNEL over column BADGE non-matches
to NOWHERE
•

Use SAVE to save the updated PERSONNEL table.

12-87

APPENDIX A
ADE SIZE LIMITS

Storing In formation
Largest Number of Lines in a Table:

1 '000

Largest Number of Columns in a Table:

Largest Number of Characters in One Column Value:

Largest Number of Digits in a Number:

Largest Number of Characters in One Line:

450

Largest Number of Characters in One Response Area:

132

Commands
Largest Number of Char act er s in One Command Input:

132

Verbs
Largest Number of Characters on a REMARK Line:

132

Maximum Level of Verb Nesting:

Reports
Largest Number of Char act er s in One Line Format:

500

Largest Number of WHERE and EXCEPT Sections:

100

A-1

APPENDIX B
TERMINAL INFORMATION

Although ADE has been designed to fully utilize the advanced
terminal
capabilities
of VT100, VT101, VT102, and VT125
terminals, you can also use ADE on a VT52 terminal.
You use ADE in the same way on a VT52 terminal except for:
•

Stopping and restarting the terminal display

•

Performing ADE special functions

•

Using MAKE, ENTER, and CHANGE commands

B.1

STARTING ADE

For ADE to work properly, the host system must have the correct
information set up for your terminal, and you must start ADE
correctly for your host system. If you start ADE correctly but
ADE does not work properly, ask your system manager to check
your system terminal information.
Table B-1 contains the host system terminal information that
must be set up for different types of terminals. See your host
system documentation
for
more
information
on
terminal
information set up.

B-1

TERMINAL INFORMATION
Table B-1:

Host System Terminal Information

TYPE OF TERMINAL:

RSTS/E:

VMS:

VT100 Series

SET VT100

$ SET TERM/DEVICE:VT100
or /DEVICE:VT101
or /DEVICE:VT102
or /DEVICE:VT125

VT52 with keypad

SET VT52

$ SET TERM/DEVICE:VT52

VT52 without keypad*

SET VT52

$ SET TERM/DEVICE:VT52

All Others*

SET LA36

$ SET TERM/DEVICE:LA36
or /DEVICE:LA120

*In ADE, you must SET TERMINAL ? to tell ADE to
"simulate" the keypad. See Section B.3.2.
Use of ADE is not supported on these terminals.

B.2

STOPPING AND RESTARTING THE TERMINAL DISPLAY

On a video terminal, sometimes you may want to stop the terminal
display, read information on the terminal, and then restart the
terminal display. Two ADE examples are:
•

Running a verb

•

Running a report with output to the terminal

If you have a VT100 Series terminal, press the NO SCROLL key to
stop the terminal display. To restart it, press the NO SCROLL
key again.
On VT52 terminals, use CTRL/S to stop the terminal
CTRL/Q to restart it.

B.3

display

and

RESETTING TERMINAL PAGE WIDTH

You may sometimes want to reset your normal terminal page width
(80 characters) to accommodate a 132-character display. You can
only do this if your terminal has Advanced Video Option (AVO)
installed.

B-2

TERMINAL INFORMATION
•

A VT102 terminal always has AVO built in

•

VT100 and VT125 terminals may or may not
your system manager if you aren't sure

•

VT52, VT101, and all non-video terminals do not have AVO

have

If your terminal does have AVO, you can set your
width to 132 characters in ADE by typing:

AVO

see

terminal

page

To use ADE on a DECMATE I (VT278) terminal, you must issue
following command as your first command in an ADE session:

the

SET WIDTH 132

B.4

USING ADE ON DECMATE I (VT278)

SET TERM VT278

B.5

PERFORMING ADE SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

ADE's function keys work differently on a VT52 than on a VT100.
Whether or not the VT52 has a keypad also makes a difference.

B.5.1

VT52 Terminal (With Keypad)

Except for the position of the ADE function keys on the keypad
and keyboard, performing ADE functions on a VT52 terminal is
like performing ADE functions on a VT100 terminal.
Figure B-1
shows you where the ADE function keys are located on a VT52.
Figure B-2 shows you where the other keys are located on a VT52.

B-3

TERMINAL INFORMATION

+-------+-------+-------+-------+
l HELP l UNDEL I UP
l
l GOLD

l
l
I <up)
l DISPLYl DEL.LNl TOP

l
I

+-------+-------+-------+-------+
I INSERT! SKIP I FNDNXTI DOWN l
7

l
I

l
9
I FIND

l(down) l
I BOTTOM!

l(right)l
l D.RGHTl

+-------+-------+-------+-------+
l RIGHT l
4

+-------+-------+-------+-------+
I

(le ft)
D.LEFT

NUMS

I
I

+-------+-------+------l
ENTER
:

+---------------+-------+-------+
(up) is the UP-ARROW key.
(down) is the DOWN-ARROW key.
(right) is the RIGHT-ARROW key.
(left) is the LEFT-ARROW key.
Figure B-1:

I•

ADE Function Keys on VT52 Terminal

./t
1t

0/
/0

,...

(

)

1-1

l ESC l 1 l 2 l 3 l 4 l 5 l 6 l 7 I 8 l 9 l 0 l - l = I '

B'I B'I

IS IKl

l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
I
l
l
l ] l
l LINE l
l
lTABl Q l W l E l R l T l Y I U I I l 0 I P l [ IBSLlFEEDlDELI
l
I CA PS l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
I
l : l " l } l
l
l CTRL l LOCK I A l S l D l F l G I H l J l K l L l ; l ' l { l RETN l
---------------------------------------------------------------~

l
l
l
l
I
l
l
l
I
l < l > l ? l
l
l
l
lSCRLlSHFTl Z I X l C l V l B I N l M l , l . l I lSHFTlREPlCPYl

--------------------------------------------------------~-------

(SPACE BAR)

Figure B-2:

VT52 Keyboard

B-4

TERMINAL INFORMATION
B.5.2

Any Terminal Without A Keypad

To use ADE's special functions on a terminal without a keypad,
you must first enter the SET TERM ? command in ADE. Then to
perform ADE functions, press the @ key followed by
the
appropriate letter key. To repeat a function, press the @ key
followed by the number of times to repeat the function, followed
by the appropriate letter key. The case (lower or upper) of the
letter keys below is significant.
The following list shows how to perform each ADE function:
FUNCTION

KEYS

FUNCTION

KEYS

FUNCTION

KEYS

BOTTOM
DEL.LN
DISPLY
DOWN
D.LEFT
D.RGHT

@PB
@PR
@PQ
@B
@PD
@PC

ENTER
FIND
FNDNXT
HELP
INSERT
RIGHT

@M
@y
@Py
@Q
@w
@C

SKIP
TOP
UNDEL
UP

@x
@PA
@R
@A

To abort a command, use CTRL/C.

B.6

USING MAKE, ENTER, AND CHANGE COMMANDS

When you use MAKE, ENTER, and CHANGE commands on a keypad
terminal, all columns of a table, all steps of a verb, or all
lines of report sections that fit on the terminal display are
presented. When you use these commands on a nonkeypad terminal,
however, only the current column, step or line is displayed. To
display more lines, use @PQ.

B-5

APPENDIX C
ERROR MESSAGES

This appendix lists SERIOUS error messages caused by either a:
•

Host system problem

•

ADE software problem

In all cases, report errors to your system manager.
Message
ADE found something wrong internally, but recovered.
That command probably didn't complete
Contact your system
manager.
Result
•

The last command you entered could not finish working.

•

ADE recovered and logged the error in your error log.

•

You may or may not be able to use ADE immediately.

Possible Cause

• Your system directory is full.
• You have used up your quota of disk blocks.
• The disk is full or too fragmented.
• There is a hardware problem on the disk.
• ADE has an internal error .

C-1

ERROR MESSAGES
Message
ADE is unable to continue --- Contact your system manager.
Result
•

The last command you entered could not finish working.

•

ADE could not recover.

•

ADE probably could not log the error.

•

ADE terminated the session.

Possible Cause
•

The disk is full or too fragmented.

•

There is a hardware problem.

•

ADE has an internal error.

Message
ADE is unable to initialize --- Contact your system manager.
-ORADE--INIT FAIL-- ...
Result
•

ADE could not get started properly.

•

ADE probably could not log the error.

•

ADE terminated the session.

Possible Cause
•

The disk is full or too fragmented.

•

There is a hardware problem.

•

The ADE task image is partially corrupted.

•

Required auxiliary files are missing.

•

ADE has an internal error.

C-2

ERROR MESSAGES
Message
ADE cannot recover from this problem:
ERN $ AXERRI
ERR:
5 @ ERL: 20020
BP2 STATUS:
8
p •••

p •••
p •••

?ADE SESSION LOST - SORRY
Result
•

The last command you entered had a problem.

•

ADE had an additional problem trying to recover.

•

ADE could not recover.

•

ADE could not log the error.

•

ADE terminated the session.

Possible Cause
•

The disk is full or too fragmented.

•

There is a hardware problem.

•

ADE has an internal error.

If any of these errors occurs, you may need to reset the host
system terminal characteristics.
In all cases, inform the
system manager. Installation/Release Notes for ADE on the host
system contain additional information to address these problems.

C-3

APPENDIX D
FILE INFORMATION

The most basic logical and physical unit in ADE is the table.
Information (or data) is stored in a table, which is structured
into lines and columns. A table is maintained at the host
system level as two files -- a pure RMS sequential data file and
a descriptor file, which contains printable definitions of
fields within the data file.
This appendix describes the descriptor and data files for the
sample PARTS table, used in examples thoughout this manual and
available on each host system.
You may notice that the
descriptor file format is identical to that of similar files
used by DATATRIEVE. This is to enable easy transfer of data
back and forth between these two software products.
The descriptor file is named DES001.ADE:
! PARTS C:30-Dec-82 10:27 PM M:30-Dec-82 10:27 PM ADE V2.1

DELETE PARTS;
DELETE PARTS-REC;
DEFINE DOMAIN PARTS USING PARTS-REC ON SY:TBL001.ADE;
DEFINE RECORD PARTS-REC USING
01 PARTS-REC.
03 PN PIC X(3).
03 PNAME PIC X(7).
03 WHOUSE PIC X(2).
03 COLOR PIC X(5).
03 WEIGHT PIC S9(2) SIGN LEADING SEPARATE
EDIT-STRING -(2)9.
03 QTY PIC S9(3) SIGN LEADING SEPARATE
EDIT-STRING -(3)9.
DEFINE FILE FOR PARTS KEY

= PN;

D-1

FILE INFORMATION
The descriptor file DES001.ADE defines and describes the
data found in the data file named TBL001.ADE:

actual

P01NUT
W2RED +12+135
P02BOLT
W2GREEN+17+167
P03SCREW W1BLUE +17+048
P04SCREW W2RED +14+143
P05CAM
W1BLUE +12+205
P06COG
W3RED +19+215
P07GEAR
W3GREY +09+234
P08BEARINGW2GREY +25+136
P09BOLT
W1WHITE+05+015
ADE can make its data available to other software product users
in an easy to understand and easy to use way. ADE can save
tables externally for use by other software, providing a copy of
the data file and one of three different types of external
descriptor files.
ADE can also save tables externally in List
for use by DIGITAL Word Processing software.
one file is generated.

Processing format
In this case, only

The List Processing format file produced from the sample PARTS
table with a SAVE PARTS EXTERNAL WPS command in ADE is named
PARTS. WPS:
! PARTS C:30-Dec-82 03:32 PM M:30-Dec-82 03:32 PM ADE V2.1

<PN> P01
<PNAME> NUT
<WHOUSE> W2
<COLOR> RED
<WEIGHT> 12
<QTY> 135
<>
<PN > P02
<PNAME> BOLT
<WHOUSE> W2
<COLOR> GREEN
<WEIGHT> 17
<QTY> 167
<>
<PN> P03
<PNAME> SCREW
<WHOUSE> W1
<COLOR> BLUE
<WEIGHT> 17
<QTY> 48
<>

D-2

FILE INFORMATION
<PN> P04
<PNAME> SCREW
<WHOUSE> W2
<COLOR> RED
<WEIGHT> 14
<QTY> 143
<>
<PN> P05
<PNAME> CAM
<WHOUSE> W1
<COLOR> BLUE
<WEIGHT> 12
<QTY> 205
<>
<PN> P06
<PNAME> COG
<WHOUSE> W3
<COLOR> RED
<WEIGHT> 19
<QTY> 215
<>
<PN> P07
<PNAME> GEAR
<WHOUSE> W3
<COLOR> GREY
<WEIGHT> 9
<QTY> 234
<>
<PN> P08
<PNAME> BEARING
<WHOUSE> W2
<COLOR> GREY
<WEIGHT> 25
<QTY> 136
<>
<PN> P09
<PNAME> BOLT
<WHOUSE> W1
<COLOR> WHITE
<WEIGHT> 5
<QTY> 15
<>

D-3

FILE INFORMATION
The descriptor file ADE produced from the sample PARTS table for
COBOL with a SAVE PARTS EXTERNAL COBOL command in ADE is named
PARTS.COB or PARTS.CSL, depending on the host system:
*PART~

C:30-Dec-82 03:31 PM M:30-Dec-82 03:31 PM ADE V2.1

01 PARTS-REC.
03 PN PIC X(3).
03 PNAME PIC X(7).
03 WHOUSE PIC X(2).
03 COLOR PIC X(5).
03 WEIGHT PIC S9(2) SIGN LEADING SEPARATE.
03 QTY PIC S9(3) SIGN LEADING SEPARATE.
*ADE KEY = PN

The descriptor file ADE produced from the sample PARTS table for
DATARIEVE with a SAVE PARTS EXTERNAL DATARIEVE command in ADE is
named PARTS.DTR:
! PARTS C:30-Dec-82 03:30 PM M:30-Dec-82 03:30 PM ADE V2.1

DELETE PARTS;
DELETE PARTS-REC;
DEFINE DOMAIN PARTS USING PARTS-REC ON PARTS.TBL;
DEFINE RECORD PARTS-REC USING
01 PARTS-REC.
03 PN PIC X(3).
03 PNAME PIC X(7).
03 WHOUSE PIC X(2).
03 COLOR PIC X(5).
03 WEIGHT PIC S9(2) SIGN LEADING SEPARATE
EDIT-STRING -(2)9.
03 QTY PIC S9(3) SIGN LEADING SEPARATE
EDIT-STRING -(3)9.
DEFINE FILE FOR PARTS KEY = PN;

D-4

FILE INFORMATION
The descriptor (map statement) file ADE produced from the sample
PARTS table for BASIC with a SAVE PARTS EXTERNAL BASIC command
in ADE is named PARTS.BAS or PARTS.B2S, depending on the host
system:
800

PARTS C:30-Dec-82 03: 31 PM M:30-Dec-82 03: 31 PM ADE V2. 1 &

MAP (PARTS)
PN$ = 3%,
PNAME$ = 7%,
WHOUSE$ = 2%,
COLOR$ = 5%,
WEIGHT$ = 3%, ! ADE DEC IM AL ( - 1 )
! ADE DEC IM AL ( - 1 )
QTY$ = 4%
! ADE KEY = PN

&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&

The three descriptor files ADE produced from the sample PARTS
table for COBOL, DATATRIEVE, and BASIC (with SAVE PARTS EXTERNAL
commands) each describe the actual data file produced, named
PARTS.TEL:
P01NUT
W2RED +12+135
P02BOLT
W2GREEN+17+167
P03SCREW W1BLUE +17+048
P04SCREW W2RED +14+143
P05CAM
W1BLUE +12+205
P06COG
W3RED +19+215
P07GEAR
W3GREY +09+234
P08BEARINGW2GREY +25+136
P09BOLT
W1WHITE+05+015

ADE data files, descriptor files, verb files, reports files, and
the ADE directory can all be moved from system account to system
account, storage device to storage device, and host system to
host system. Contact your system manager for information on how
to do this.

D-5

GLOSSARY

ARITHMETIC EXPRESSION
An expression composed of column names, numeric values, the
basic arithmetic symbols for addition (+), subtraction (-),
multiplication (*),division (/),and parentheses. Used in the
CALCULATE command.
BACKUP WORKSHEET
The previous worksheet, a copy of your current worksheet without
the last change you made to it.
To replace your current
worksheet with the backup worksheet, use the BACKUP command.
See also WORKSHEET, CURRENT WORKSHEET, and NEW WORKSHEET.
CHARACTER COLUMN
A column that can contain character values. You can use valid
numeric values in a character column for the arithmetic commands
if the entire character column contains only valid numeric
values.
CHARACTER VALUE
A value that can contain any character.
COLUMN
A vertical group of values in the worksheet or
column has a name you use to refer to it.

table.

Each

COMMAND
A one-word direction followed by one or more pieces
of
information that tells ADE to perform a specific operation, such
as saving the current worksheet as a table.
CONDITION
An expression that specifies a set of lines in the worksheet or
a table that a command is to work with. A condition has three
parts: column name, operator, and value. The condition QTY LT
20 specifies the set of lines where the values in the column QTY
are less than the value 20.

Glossary-1

GLOSSARY
CURRENT WORKSHEET
The worksheet that you are working with. To display an outline
of
the
current worksheet, use the OUTLINE command.
To
permanently save the values in the current worksheet in a table,
use the SAVE command. See also WORKSHEET, NEW WORKSHEET, and
BACKUP WORKSHEET.
DATE COLUMN
A column that can contain only date values.
DATE VALUE
A value that can contain only characters
current date format.

that

conform

the

DATE FORMAT
The format in which the date January 2, 1980 is displayed.
The
default date format is 2-Jan-80. To change the date format, use
the SET DATE command and enter the date January 2, 1980 in
whatever valid format you want. The date format determines how
all date values and dates in reports are displayed.
DEFAULT
A value or action that is the most likely to be used and is used
if you do not replace it. Normally refers to values for command
input or standard operations like report making.
EXPRESSION
A sequence of symbols that has a special meaning to ADE, such as
LINE GT 10. See also ARITHMETIC EXPRESSION and CONDITION.
FUNCTION KEY
One of several keys on the keypad of video terminals that tells
ADE to perform a specific action, such as terminating data
entry.
ITEM
An ADE operand that you can use in the arithmetic commands (ADD,
SUBTRACT, MULTIPLY, and DIVIDE).

Glossary-2

GLOSSARY
KEY COLUMN
A column that you designate to keep the lines in the worksheet
or a table in order. Lines are always ordered by ascending key
column value. The worksheet or a table does not have to have a
key column, but, if it does, it can have only one key column.
Each value in a key column must be unique.
KEYPAD
A subset of the keys on a video terminal that includes the keys
that control ADE's special functions. See also FUNCTION KEY.
LINE
A horizontal group of values in the worksheet or a table.
A
line may be referred to in commands by its current line number
in the worksheet or a table.
LINE FORMAT
A sequence of report instruction keywords, column names, and
text strings that specifies how a line in report output should
be formatted. The TOP, BOTTOM, WHERE, and EXCEPT sections of a
report procedure are made up of line formats.
NAME
A unique identifying string of characters that you use to
designate a particular table, verb, report, or a column in the
worksheet or a table.
NEGATIVE NUMBER FORMAT
The format for negative numbers. The default format is -9000,
with a leading minus sign and no commas. The negative number
format determines how all numbers, including negative numbers,
appear in tables and reports.
Numeric data entry is also
controlled by this format.
To change the negative number
format, use the SET NEGATIVE command.
NEST
To use the name of one verb as a step in another verb.
NEW WORKSHEET
A worksheet that replaces your current worksheet.
You can
replace your current worksheet with a worksheet made with the
MAKE command, with a copy of a table or specified part of a
table using the GET command, or with the backup worksheet using
the BACKUP command. See also WORKSHEET, CURRENT WORKSHEET, and
BACKUP WORKSHEET.
Glossary-3

GLOSSARY
NUMERIC COLUMN
A column that can contain only numeric values.
NUMERIC VALUE
A value that can contain only characters
current negative number format, with
being optional.

that conform to the
the negative indicator

OPERAND
A column name, a numeric value, or a date value that can be used
in the arithmetic commands and the MOVE command. Also includes
a group of characters without spaces and a group of characters
with or without spaces enclosed in quotes for the MOVE command.
OPERATOR
A part of a condition. Includes the symbols for the comparison
operations of equal (EQ or=), not equal (NE or<>), less than
(LT or<), less than or equal (LE or<=), greater than (GT or
>), greater than or equal (GE or>=), between (BT), begins with
(BW), ends with (EW) and contains (CO).
OPTION
An ADE parameter that you can change with the SET command.
OUTLINE
The structure of the current worksheet or a table, especially as
displayed
with the OUTLINE command.
The OUTLINE command
displays the names and types of columns, as well as the number
of lines, in the current worksheet or a table.
PARAMETER
One of a limited set of operational settings that determine
ADE controls its displays or performs commands.

how

PROCEDURE
A set of ADE commands or report instructions saved with a name.
All the commands in a verb or the report instructions in a
report are carried out in order when the procedure is used.
To
use a procedure, you use its name as you would a command.

Glossary-4

GLOSSARY
REPORT
A procedure made up of report instructions organized in sections
that specify how to list the values in the current worksheet or
a table.
SECTION
A part of a report procedure that specifies how to list a
particular part of report output, such as the top of the page,
or that specifies formats for the entire report output.
STEP
One ADE command, one verb name, or one report
associated worksheet or table name in a verb.

name

with

its

TABLE
The unit of permanent data storage in ADE. A table consists of
one or more values arranged in lines and columns.
When
displayed, the column names are also considered to be part of a
table.
To make use of a table, you must include its name in a
command. To work with the values in a table, you copy the table
or a specified part of the table into the worksheet with the GET
command. See also WORKSHEET and NEW WORKSHEET.
VALUE
A
A worksheet or table entry. Also a part of a condition.
value consists of one or more letters, numbers, or other
characters, including spaces.
VERB
A procedure made up of ADE commands, verb names, or report names
referred to as steps that specify a set of operations for ADE to
perform.
WORKSHEET
A copy of a table or specified part of a table used as a
"scratch-pad." To work with an existing table, you copy the
table or specified part of the table into the worksheet with the
GET command. Changing the worksheet does not in any way affect
any table, including a table copied into the worksheet.
To
permanently save the values in the current worksheet in a table,
use the SAVE command. See also BACKUP WORKSHEET, NEW WORKSHEET,
and CURRENT WORKSHEET.

Glossary-5

INDEX

-AAbbreviating commands and
keywords, 4-2
Access
to ADE tables, verbs, and
reports, 8-13
to non-ADE files, 7-8
to system, 3-1
ADD command, 12-4
Adding data to the worksheet,
3-22
Adding new columns to the
worksheet, 6-5
ADE
account, 2-8
concepts, 2-1 to 2-9
directory, 2-8
exiting, 3-34
file protection, 2-9
function keys, 3-25 to 3-34
language rules, 4-1 to 4-10
overview, 1-1 to 1-4
prom pt, 3-2
screen form at, 3-4fg
starting, 3-2
Advanced ADE commands, 8-1 to
8-16
ALLOW, 8-13
APPEND, 8-3
BREAK, 8-11
CALCULATE, 8-1
COMBINE, 8-6
COPY, 8-14
MERGE, 8-3
SET, 8-14
UPDATE, 8-9
ALL keyword, 4-8
ALLOW command, 8-13
APPEND command, 8-3, 8-5, 12-9
Arithmetic commands
advanced, 8-1
basic, 6-10 to 6-13
AS optional phrase, 7-4
ASK command, 9-15, 12-11

-BBACKUP command, 12-14
BASIC, 7-9

BREAK command, 8-11 to 8-13,
12-15
-C-

CALCULATE command, 8-1, 12-18
CAPS LOCK Key, 3-6
CHANGE command, 3-27, 6-7, 12-21
Changing data in the worksheet,
5-5, 6-7
Character columns, 4-2
COBOL, 7-9
Column
rules for naming, 4-1
Column type
specified by AS phrase, 7-4
Columns
character, 4-2
date, 4-4
defining numeric, 4-6
defining types, 4-5
definition, 2-1
key, 4-7
naming, 5-2
numeric, 4-3
types, 4-2 to 4-6
COMBINE command, 8-6 to 8-9,
12-27
Command entry
abbreviations, 3-8
defaults, 3-10
error messages, 3-11
line, 3-5
mistak~s, 3-10
prompted, 3-8
unprompted, 8-16
Commands
abbreviations, 4-2
ADD, 6-11, 12-4
ALLOW, 8-13
APPEND, 8-3, 8-5, 12-9
ASK, 9-15, l2-11
BACKUP, 12-14
BREAK, 8-11 to 8-13, 12-15
CALCULATE, 8-1 , 12-1 8
CHANGE, 3-27, 6-7, 12-21
COMBINE, 8-6 to 8-9, 12-27
COPY, 8-14, 12-31
DIVIDE, 6-11, 12-32
ENTER, 3-22, 6-4, 12-35
ERASE, 11-5, 12-38
Index-1

Commands (Cont.)
EXIT, 3-34, 12-40
GET, 6-2, 12-41
GRAPH, 6-13, 12-42
HELP, 1-1, 3-12 to 3-14, 12-43
How to enter, 3-8
LIST, 6-2, 12-44
LIST WORKSHEET, 6-3
MAKE, 3-15, 12-47
MERGE, 8-3 to 8-5, 12-49
MOVE, 6-6, 12-52
MULTIPLY, 6-11, 12-54
NAMES, 3-9, 6-1, 12-57
OUTLINE, 3-22, 6-2, 11-3, 12-59
OUTLINE WORKSHEET, 6-2
PICK, 6-9, 12-60
REMARK, 12-62
RENAME, 6-8, 11-4, 12-63
SAVE, 3-21, 6-4, 12-65
SET, 8-14 to 8-16, 12-67
SORT, 6-8, 12-70
SUBTRACT, 6-11 , 12-7 4
TALLY, 6-11, 12-77
TOTAL, 6-11, 12-79
TRAIN, 1-1, 3-7, 12-84
UPDATE, 8-9 to 8-11, 12-85
Comments
in verbs, 9-14
Condition
specified by WHERE and EXCEPT,
7-2
Conditional operators, 4-9, 7-3
COPY command, 8-14, 12-31
with IN phrase, 7-7
CTRL/ C key, 3-8

-EENTER command, 6-4, 12-35
Entering commands, 3-8
Entering data, 3-17 to 3-21
Entering new data into the
worksheet, 6-4 to 6-7
ERASE command, 11-5, 12-38
Error messages, 3-5
command entry, 3-11
in verbs, 9-8
EXCEPT optional phrase, 7-2
EXIT command, 3-34, 12-40
Exiting ADE, 3-34
External (non-ADE) files
file types and extensions, 7-9
specified by EXTERNAL phrase,
7-9
EXTERNAL optional phrase, 7-9
to specify non-ADE files, 7-9
-F-

File access, 7-8
File protection, 2-9
Function keys, 3-25 to 3-34
active, 3-26
GOLD, 3-26
in verbs, 9-9
used to repeat functions, 3-26
-G-

GET command, 6-2, 12-41
with IN phrase, 7-7
GOLD key, 3-26
GRAPH command, 6-13, 12-42
Graphing data, 6-13

-D-H-

Data entry, 3-17 to 3-21
DATATRIEVE, 7-10
Date columns, 4-4
Dates
default form at, 4-4
Defaults
command entry, 3-10
Defining column types, 4-5
DELETE key, 3-8, 3-17
Deleting columns and lines in the
worksheet, 6-10
Designing tables, 6-16 to 6-17
Disk area
specified by IN phrase, 7-7
DIVIDE command, 12-32

HELP command, 1-1, 3-12 to 3-14,
12-43
HELP key, 1-1, 3-14 to 3-15
Helping prompt line, 3-5

-IIN optional phrase, 7-7
INSERT mode, 9-9

-KKey columns
defining, 5-3

Index-2

Key columns (Cont.)
definition, 2-1
how to specify, 4-7
rules, 4-7
specified by AS phrase, 7-4
Keyboard
How to use, 3-6
VT 100, 3-6fg
VT52, B-4fg
Keypad
used to enter numeric data,
3-27
VT100, 3-25fg
VT52, B-4fg
Keys
CAPS LOCK, 3-6
CTRL/C, 3-8
DELETE, 3-8, 3-17
function, 3-25 to 3-34
GOLD, 3-26
HELP, 1-1, 3-14 to 3-15
NO SCROLL, 5-5
RETURN, 3-8, 3-17
Keywords
abbreviations, 4-2
ALL, 4-8
LINE, 6-3
OMIT, 4-8
TODAY, 4-4

-LLine
definition, 2-1
LINE keyword, 6-3
LIST command, 6-2, 12-44
with IN phrase, 7-7
LIST WORKSHEET command, 6-3
Listing the worksheet, 5-4
Listing the worksheet on the
printer, 6-3
Listing the worksheet on the
term in al, 6-2
Listing worksheet lines, 6-3
Login procedure, 3-2
-M-

MAKE COLUMN command
with AS phrase, 7-4
MAKE command, 12-47
used in reports, 10-5
Making a simple ADE report, 6-14
to 6-15
Making worksheet columns, 3-16

MERGE command, 8-3 to 8-5, 12-49
Messages
error, 3-5
Mistakes in command entry, 3-10
MOVE command, 6-6, 12-52
MULTIPLY command, 12-54
-N-

NAMES command, 6-1, 12-57
with IN phrase, 7-7
Naming columns, tables, and
worksheets, 4-1
Naming reports, 10-4
Naming verbs, 9-3
Nesting verbs, 9-11
NO SCROLL key, 5-5
Numeric columns, 4-3
Numeric keypad, 3-27
-0-

OMIT keyword, 4-8
Operators
Conditional, 4-9
Optional phrases, 7-1 to 7-10
AS, 7-4
EXCEPT, 7-2
EXTERNAL, 7-9
IN, 7-7
TO, 7-5
TO PRINTER, 6-3
WHERE, 7-2
OUTLINE command, 3-22, 6-2, 11-3,
12-59
with IN phrase, 7-7
OUTLINE WORKSHEET command, 6-2
Output
specified by TO phrase, 7-5

-PPICK command, 12-60
used to delete columns and
lines, 6-10
used to reorder data, 6-9
Printer port option, 7-6
Printing the worksheet, 6-3
Procedure
Report, 2-2
Verb, 2-2
Prompt
ADE, 3-2
command entry, 3-5
helping, 3-5
Index-3

Protection
ADE file, 2-9

-RRecord Management Services (RMS),
7-9
REMARK command, 12-62
REN AME c om mand , 6- 8 , 1 1- 4 , 12 - 6 3
with AS phrase, 7-4
Renaming
columns, 6-7
Reordering data in the worksheet
with PICK command, 6-9
with SORT command, 6-8
Reports, 10-1 to 10-39
naming, 10-4
simple, 6-14 to 6-15
RETURN key, 3-8, 3-17
RMS
See Record Management Services
Rounding numbers, 8-3
Rules
naming reports, 10-4
naming verbs, 9-3

Table (Cont.)
naming columns, 5-2
parts of, 2-3
rules for naming, 4-1
saving, 5-6
Tables
How to display names and
outlines, 6-1
Saving worksheet as, 6-4
TALLY command, 12-77
Terminal
VT100 keyboard, 3-6fg
Terminal display options, 8-14
TO optional phrase, 7-5
TO PRINTER optional phrase, 6-3
TODAY keyword, 4-4
TOTAL command, 12-79
used in reports, 10-4
TRAIN command, 1-1, 3-7, 12-84
Troubleshooting errors in verbs,
9-7
Truncating numbers, 8-3
-U-

Unprompted command entry, 8-16
UPDATE command, 8-9 to 8-11,
12-85

-S-

SAVE command, 6-4, 12-65
Saving the worksheet, 3-21
Screen
command area, 3-4
format, 3-4fg
message area, 3-5
scrolling area, 3-5
Scrolling area, 3-5
SET comm and , 8- 1 4 to 8 - 1 6 , 12- 6 7
Size limits
ADE table columns, 6-16
ADE table lines, 6-16
SORT command, 6-8, 12-70
used in reports, 10-3
SUBTRACT command, 12-74
System account, 2-8

-V-

Value
definition, 2-1
Verbs, 9-1 to 9-16
comment lines, 9-14
function keys, 9-9
INSERT mode, 9-9
nesting, 9-11
rules for naming, 9-3
troubleshooting, 9-7
using reports, 9-13
VT100 Keyboard, 3-6fg

-W-

-TTable
column size limits, 6-16
defining key columns, 5-3
definition, 2-1
designing, 6-16 to 6-17
getting into the worksheet, 6-2
line size limits, 6-16
making, 5-1 to 5-6

WHERE optional phrase, 7-2
Word Processing (WPS), 7-10
Worksheet
Adding data, 3-22
adding new columns to, 6-5
Changing data in, 5-5
changing data in, 6-7
definition, 2-1
Entering data, 5-3
entering new data, 6-4 to 6-7

Index-4

Worksheet (Cont.)
getting table into, 6-2
graphing data in, 6-13
listing, 5-4
listing on the terminal, 6-2
making, 3-15, 5-2
making columns, 3-16
renaming columns in, 6-7

Worksheet (Cont.)
reordering data in, 6-8 to 6-9
rules for naming, 4-1
saving, 3-21
saving as table, 5-6
Worksheet lines
How to specify, 4-8
WPS
See Word Processing

Index-5

HOW TO ORDER ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION
DIRECT TELEPHONE ORDERS
In Continental USA
and Puerto Rico
call 800-258-1710

In Canada
call 800-267-6146

In New Hampshire,
Alaska or Hawaii
call 603-884-6660

DIRECT MAIL ORDERS (U.S. and Puerto Rico*)
DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
P.O. Box CS2008
Nashua, New Hampshire 03061

DIRECT MAIL ORDERS (Canada)
DIGITAL EQUIPMENT OF CANADA LTD.
940 Belfast Road
Ottawa, Ontario, Canada K1G 4C2
Attn: A&SG Business Manager

INTERNATIONAL
DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
A&SG Business Manager
c/o Digital's local subsidiary
or approved distributor

Internal orders should be placed through the Software Distribution Center (SOC), Digital
Equipment Corporation, Northboro, Massachusetts 01532
*Any prepaid ·order from Puerto Rico must be placed
with the Local Digital Subsidiary:

809-754-7575